Avoid compilation gripes.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e
DL
29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 31
d9c9b920
DL
32** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
33new display features described below.
34
e90813b8
AC
35** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
36all of the new display features describe below. The port currently
37lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 38
1fa28578
GM
39\f
40* Changes in Emacs 21.1
41
d371949a
DL
42** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
43paragraphs filled as you modify them.
44
c6f01e00
MB
45** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
46To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
47`auto-compression-mode' command.
48
4c724b32
DL
49** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
50`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
51
059cd2e1 52+++
6a0b0752
MB
53** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
54to be visited as images.
55
b856f39c 56+++
068127d6
GM
57** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
58operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
59
fd06c7da
MB
60** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
61(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
62remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
63may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
64
8ac08dea 65+++
62c273d7
DL
66** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
67is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
68
69+++
70** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
71mode `iswitchb-mode'.
72
8ac08dea 73+++
f393cf90
DL
74** Gnus changes.
75
76The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
77four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
78internationalization and mail-fetching.
79
80*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
81many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
82
83If you used procmail like in
84
85(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
86(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
87(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
88(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
89
327652be 90this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
91
92(setq mail-sources
93 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
94 :suffix ".in")))
95
96More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
97Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
98
99*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
100Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
101
60dd7e0e
DL
102*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
103parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables.
104Separate MIME packages like SEMI will not work. There are built-in
105facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is now just a
106compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
107
108*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
109called to position point.
110
111*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
112summary buffers and NOV files.
113
114*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
115of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
116
117*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
118subtly different manner.
119
120*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
121and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
122ever-changing layouts.
123
124*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
125
126*** There is image support.
127
128** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1298859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
130more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
131empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
132window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
133on.
134
ba9eeda1
GM
135** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
136set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
137file that is already visited under a different name.
138
42ac0ae5
GM
139** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
140nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
141
142** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
143recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
144signaled.
145
ba9eeda1 146** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
147support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
148use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
149buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
150M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
151new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
152
b941a14b 153+++
ba9eeda1 154** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 155and displays information about that.
b941a14b 156
ba9eeda1 157** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
158file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
159
d7b38c05 160** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 161added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
162Postscript files are included.
163
164** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
165`dired-ref.tex'.
166
25ad1371
GM
167** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
168expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
169
170This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
171determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
172mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
173interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
174regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
175associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
176
b856f39c 177+++
f0298744
DL
178** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
179displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
180menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
181menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
182
9a8d84ca
DL
183** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
184a version-dependent component.
185
d76c03ea
GM
186** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
187Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
188will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
189character is still bound as before.
190
3b4fa1b2
DL
191** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
192using that menu.
193
40e857ea 194** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 195suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 196
beb2eb00 197+++
c08398de
DL
198** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
199buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
200contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
201by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
202insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
203the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
204Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
205
db7a3ede 206+++
3d6cd763
GM
207** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
208coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
209escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
210such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
211recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 212always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 213read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
214(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
215RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 216
0b8a3a6d
DL
217** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
218environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
219
424d8b44 220+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
221** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
222point in a pop-up window.
223
6d35b49f 224+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
225** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
226displays all characters in that character set.
227
228** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
229coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
230
a4067978 231+++
5cb6a58e 232** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
233on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
234defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 235
424d8b44 236+++
a1b8d58b
GM
237** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
238
6e417ca5
DL
239** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
240been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
241
424d8b44 242+++
5898e075
DL
243** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
244`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
245indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
246indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
247
424d8b44 248+++
abfcc168
GM
249** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
250sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 251(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
252You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
253
424d8b44 254+++
cc181e95
GM
255** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
256on the display using several methods
257
424d8b44 258+++
cc181e95
GM
259- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
260a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
261be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
262
424d8b44 263+++
cc181e95
GM
264- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
265equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
266
da4496b6 267- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
268
269- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
270the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
271
424d8b44 272+++
3b4fa1b2 273** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 274an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 275command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 276does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 277
424d8b44 278+++
176256a1 279** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
280`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
281typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 282
dd0add8e
DL
283** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
284characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
285
bf3ba9ac 286+++
699238d9
GM
287** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
288compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
289this behavior.
290
291The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
292compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
293Emacs dump core.
294
424d8b44 295+++
699238d9 296** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 297
7233c5bd
GM
298*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
299whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
300is useful for debugging X problems.
301
302Example:
303
699238d9 304 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 305
100b3cbb
GM
306*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
307visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
308the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
309and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
310visual class names are
311
312 TrueColor
313 PseudoColor
314 DirectColor
315 StaticColor
316 GrayScale
317 StaticGray
318
319Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
320`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
321meaning.
322
323The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
324supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
325`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
326visual.
327
328Example:
329
699238d9 330 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
331
332*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
333specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
334default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
335resource values are `true' or `on'.
336
337Example:
338
699238d9 339 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 340
0d0c76b8
EZ
341** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
342more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
343now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
344
42088c12 345** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 346display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
347shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
348be customized.
c60ea02e 349
424d8b44 350+++
31047e0d
DL
351** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
352
424d8b44 353+++
b02786f9
GM
354** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
355all frames except the selected one.
356
3261c1d8
DL
357** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
358to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
359
ffe36136 360** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
361the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
362MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
363displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
364
0292b49f 365+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
366** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
367MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 368
559cee90
DL
369** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
370read mail from the menu etc.
371
480b5773 372+++
271b4185
GM
373** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
374a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
375
0daee095
GM
376** Changes in Texinfo mode.
377
378** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
379macros
380
381 Key binding Macro
382 -------------------------
383 C-c C-c C-s @strong
384 C-c C-c C-e @emph
385 C-c C-c u @url
386 C-c C-c q @quotation
387 C-c C-c m @email
388
559cee90
DL
389** Changes in Outline mode.
390
391There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
392`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
393the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
394
327652be 395** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 396
c0a8c108
EZ
397+++
398*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
399with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
400are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
401Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
402buffers to kill, as before.
403
404Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 405i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
406this way.
407
956777b3
GM
408** Changes to Show Paren mode.
409
410*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
411The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
412use. Default is 1000.
413
f6989277 414+++
404fa7d6
DL
415** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
416groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
417
424d8b44
DL
418+++
419** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
420M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
421M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
422buffers.
8964fec7 423
424d8b44 424+++
39783d73
WP
425** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
426under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
427.emacs file.
428
429The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
430determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
431
d35fce81
GM
432** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
433abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
434`directory-abbrev-alist'.
435
a933dad1
DL
436** Faces and frame parameters.
437
438There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
439Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
440`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
441`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
442sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
443for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
444parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
445
446Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
447`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 448`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
449`default' face and vice versa.
450
d80061fa 451+++
f77a4a8a
GM
452** New face `menu'.
453
454The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
455Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
456attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
457
424d8b44 458+++
a933dad1
DL
459** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
460
461The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
462colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
463correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
464the screen gamma of a frame's display.
465
466PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
467in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
468color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
469
470The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
471`ScreenGamma'.
472
473** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
474
475The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
476Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
477oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
478of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
479the text.
480
481** Emacs has a new face implementation.
482
483The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
484font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
485height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
486These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
487specify a font.
488
489Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
490These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
491under Lisp changes, below.
492
493** New default font is Courier 12pt.
494
424d8b44
DL
495+++
496** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
497of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
498otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
499
500** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
501truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
502foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
503customizing face `fringe'.
504
505** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
506can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
507
508** LessTif support.
509
424d8b44
DL
510Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
511You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
512
513** Toolkit scroll bars.
514
515Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
516LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
517configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
518bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
519bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
520Emacs.
521
522When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
523Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
524Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
525Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
526define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
527`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
528
529Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
530a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
531directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
532different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
533system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
534add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
535
536The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
537`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
538This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
539image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
540Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
541
542** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
543
544When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
545widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
546Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
547
424d8b44 548+++
a933dad1
DL
549** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
550
551When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
552whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
553defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
554highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
555displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
556whitespace.
557
6e612d4d 558+++
a933dad1
DL
559** Busy-cursor.
560
561Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
562display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
563
424d8b44 564+++
a933dad1
DL
565** Blinking cursor
566
567M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
568terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
569and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
570the group `cursor'.
571
8ac08dea 572+++
a933dad1
DL
573** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
574
575This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
576generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
577See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
578details.
579
580Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
581have to do anything to activate it.
582
583** Tabs and variable-width text.
584
585Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
586defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
587independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
588Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
589
590** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
591
424d8b44 592+++
a933dad1
DL
593*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
594
595 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
596
79dd1637
RS
597The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
598LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 599
79dd1637
RS
600*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
601LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 602
34d90e29 603+++
a933dad1
DL
604** Hscrolling in C code.
605
cc181e95
GM
606Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
607`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
608customized.
a933dad1 609
8ac08dea 610+++
a933dad1
DL
611** Tool bar support.
612
613Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
614of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
615changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
616displayed. To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of
617extra icons for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
a933dad1 618
424d8b44 619+++
a933dad1
DL
620** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
621
622Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
623mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
624line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
625about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
626in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
627
628Currently, the following actions have been defined:
629
630- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
631buffers.
632
633- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
634M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
635
636- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
637
424d8b44
DL
638- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
639`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
640
641- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
642
643** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
644
645When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 646from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
647non-nil.
648
649** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
650
651Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
652Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
653the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
654italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
655Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
656attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
657on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
658
659** Sound support
660
2f516940 661Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 662driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 663supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 664
424d8b44 665+++
a933dad1
DL
666** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
667the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
668forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
669value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
670users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
671even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
672
673The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
674
0e18b431 675+++
a933dad1
DL
676** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
677
678As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
679drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
680`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
681
fdd8bb68 682+++
a933dad1
DL
683** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
684bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
685
686This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
687`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
688variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
689
c5d00c64 690+++
a933dad1
DL
691** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
692
693When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
694value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
695number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 696fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
697
698When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
699value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
700number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 701fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
702
703** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
704notably at the end of lines.
705
706All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
707spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
708
424d8b44 709+++
eee54b0e
DL
710There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
711
a933dad1
DL
712** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
713query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
714after each match to get the replacement text.
715
00782214 716+++
d5483ab1
GM
717** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
718you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 719
424d8b44 720** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
721you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
722lisp-complete-symbol.
723
7af69644 724+++
a933dad1
DL
725** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
726
163ea954
RS
727If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
728longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
729it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
730window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
731
732- User option: max-mini-window-height
733
734Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
735fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
736specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
737
738Default is 0.25.
739
2f72fd2f
GM
740** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
741
0d43b60d
GM
742** Changes to hideshow.el
743
744Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
745selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
746conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
747
748*** Generalized block selection and traversal
749
750A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
751(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
752which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
753`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
754point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
755(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
756
757If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
758i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
759backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
760the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
761
762*** Isearch support for updating mode line
763
764During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
765blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
766line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
767portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
768is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
769
770To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
771something like this in your .emacs.
772
773 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
774 (lambda ()
775 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
776
327652be
TTN
777*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
778
779Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
780header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
781`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
782moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
783block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
784behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
785useful.
786
787You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
788function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
789of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
790code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
791appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
792
793(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
794 (hs-hide-level 1)
795 (forward-sexp 1))
796(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
797
798The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
799emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
800only for code blocks.
801
802*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
803
804Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
805parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
806display for implementation.
807
808*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
809
810The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
811LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
812which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
813new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
814
815 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
816 hs-show-block C-c C-s
817 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
818 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
819 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
820 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
821 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
822
823These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
824
559cee90
DL
825** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
826
424d8b44 827+++
1b24b888
GM
828*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
829an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
830log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
831
424d8b44 832+++
1b24b888
GM
833**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
834current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
835
836+++
1b24b888
GM
837*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
838in a log file.
eb2aac9d 839
502004be 840+++
1b24b888
GM
841*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
842entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 843
502004be 844+++
1b24b888 845*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
846version number is performed based on regular expressions from
847`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
848Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 849
2c63c979 850*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 851
79c78e77
GM
852** Changes to cmuscheme
853
854*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
855`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
856
3476b54a
GM
857** Changes in Font Lock
858
859*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
860font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
861mode.
862
2c63c979
SM
863*** multiline patterns are now supported.
864
b3b98592
GM
865** Comint (subshell) changes
866
988cded7
MB
867These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
868include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
869
870*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
871to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
872parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
873user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
874this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
875respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
876feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
877`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
878
879*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
880and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
881
988cded7 882*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
883buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
884buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
885
886The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
887M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
888the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
889
988cded7
MB
890*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
891and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
892see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 893
988cded7 894*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
895saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
896argument, it appends to the file.
897
988cded7 898*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
899(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
900compatibility.
901
902
e26cec67
GM
903** Changes to Rmail mode
904
c0510d27
GM
905*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
906set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
907receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
908recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
909`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
910as correspondent.
911
912Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
913mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 914regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 915
3b55acc9
GM
916*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
917to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
918Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
919with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
920for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
921
6a1950ec
GM
922*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
923like `j'.
924
5bb6f079
RS
925*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
926specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 927digest message.
e26cec67 928
993d8b7d
DL
929*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
930in which folder to put messages automatically.
931
400a1ed0
GM
932** Changes to TeX mode
933
934The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
935`latex-mode'.
936
a933dad1
DL
937** Changes to RefTeX mode
938
939*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
940 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
941 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
942 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
943 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
944 can be edited from that buffer.
945
946*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
947 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
948 `A' to use all marked entries).
949
950*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
951 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
952
953*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
954 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
955 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
956 been cited.
957
38de9631
GM
958** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
959The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
960semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
961in column 1 are always made leaves.
962
a933dad1
DL
963** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
964has the following new features:
965
966*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
967may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
968to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
969time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
970
971*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
972feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
973file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
974compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
975pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
976defaults to 1.
977
5d94f558 978** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
979file names.
980
424d8b44 981+++
a933dad1
DL
982** Tooltips.
983
984Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
985mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
986can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
987
988Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
989variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
990the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
991tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
992
424d8b44 993+++
a933dad1
DL
994** Customize changes
995
996*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
997`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
998cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
999
1000*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1001Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1002default).
1003
0ae51efb
GM
1004*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1005between custom options. Example:
1006
1007 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1008 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1009 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1010 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1011 :group 'mule
1012 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1013 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1014
1015This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1016current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1017first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1018
a933dad1
DL
1019** New features in evaluation commands
1020
5e03eb84 1021*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1022modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1023print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1024customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1025eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1026
5e03eb84
GM
1027*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1028code when called with a prefix argument.
1029
ead53494
GM
1030** Ispell changes
1031
37d8a691 1032+++
bbe15990
EZ
1033*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1034transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1035spell-checks the current buffer.
1036
37d8a691 1037+++
385ff9e3
GM
1038*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1039added.
1040
1041*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1042correction is made and re-checked.
1043
74ec6045 1044*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1045
1046*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1047cases.
1048
1049*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1050on syntax errors.
1051
1052*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1053end of the buffer.
1054
a933dad1
DL
1055** Dired changes
1056
1057*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1058command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1059is, delete only empty directories.
1060
1061*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1062command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1063copy directories recursively.
1064
f6737cde
GM
1065*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1066in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1067the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1068
2f72fd2f
GM
1069*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1070replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1071directory.
1072
7381ae05
MB
1073*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1074a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1075This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1076will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1077accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1078
e024b101
GM
1079*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1080from ls switches.
1081
a933dad1
DL
1082** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1083use the -f option when sending mail.
1084
b1c609b1
GM
1085** CC mode changes.
1086
1087Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1088current user setups (although it's believed that these
1089incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1090However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1091back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1092compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1093release.
1094
7972fcfc
GM
1095*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1096This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1097of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1098non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1099want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1100have to bother.
1101
1102Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1103situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1104and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1105If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1106the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1107by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1108
b1c609b1
GM
1109*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1110When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1111variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1112take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1113is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1114settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1115possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1116Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1117
1118By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1119special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1120the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1121of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1122above.
1123
1124Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1125when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1126function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1127call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1128then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1129values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1130only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1131function documentation for more info.
1132
1133The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1134especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1135with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1136intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1137such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1138is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1139configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1140global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1141
1142(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1143
1144**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1145This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1146
1147This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1148variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1149completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1150the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1151empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1152style system.
1153
1154**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1155In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1156c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1157as far as possible.
1158
1159*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1160CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1161surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1162chapter about this in the manual.
1163
1164**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1165The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1166recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1167primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1168adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1169
1170**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1171This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1172c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1173
1174**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1175This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1176
1177It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1178Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1179A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1180inside CC Mode.
1181
1182Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1183causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1184the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1185available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1186cc-mode/).
1187
1188**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1189The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1190specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1191literals.
1192
1193**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1194It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1195prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1196you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1197this function.
1198
1199*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1200It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1201to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1202struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1203Thanks to Eric Eide.
1204
1205*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1206It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1207opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1208
1209**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1210
1211*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1212See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1213better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1214and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1215
1216*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1217previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1218the column specified by comment-column.
1219
1220*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1221In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1222is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1223prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1224contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1225don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1226
1227*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1228instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1229arguments.
1230
1231*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1232
1233*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1234c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1235c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1236variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1237Provan).
1238
1239*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1240
c407c570
GM
1241** Makefile mode changes
1242
1243*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1244
5d94f558 1245*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1246Fontlock mode is active.
1247
87be76f6
GM
1248** Isearch changes
1249
3353ef5a
GM
1250*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1251so that searches can be resumed.
1252
1253*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1254respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1255that started the search.
1256
87be76f6 1257*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1258selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1259
c8a8458a 1260+++
87be76f6
GM
1261*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1262
d35fce81 1263Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1264`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1265search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1266before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1267highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1268`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1269
1270The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1271will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1272Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1273using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1274usual snappy response.
1275
1276If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1277matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1278set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1279isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1280
21bc6203 1281+++
35384f06
GM
1282** Changes in sort.el
1283
1284The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1285as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1286new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1287numeric base.
87be76f6 1288
d7b511c4
GM
1289** Changes to Ange-ftp
1290
424d8b44 1291+++
d7b511c4 1292*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1293names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1294sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1295
d7b511c4
GM
1296*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1297ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1298
9d453139
SS
1299*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1300output ^M at the end of lines.
1301
4b9347b3
GM
1302** Shell script mode changes.
1303
1304Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1305derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1306sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1307
79214ddf
FP
1308** Etags changes.
1309
1310*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1311
aca0be23 1312*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1313possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1314{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1315This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1316a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1317
79214ddf
FP
1318*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1319declarations when given the --declarations option.
1320
1321*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1322"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1323
1324*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1325types.
1326
de370c4c 1327*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1328
1329*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1330
1331*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1332are now tagged.
1333
1334*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1335variables are tagged.
1336
1337*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1338
8dc78b52
FP
1339*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1340for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1341
c8d94f86 1342+++
f6737cde
GM
1343** Changes in etags.el
1344
3f6e4b8b
GM
1345*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1346tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1347is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1348
f6737cde
GM
1349*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1350the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1351
1352If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1353FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1354TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1355obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1356
1357TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1358
1359FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1360List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1361
1362A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1363
1364 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1365 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1366 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1367
1368*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1369of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1370
1371*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1372names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1373
424d8b44 1374+++
fbc164de
PE
1375** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1376and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1377LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1378
c3eb1f10 1379+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1380** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1381Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
13828859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1383GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
13848859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1385releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1386(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1387
424d8b44 1388+++
163ea954 1389** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1390remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1391appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1392
1393** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1394
424d8b44 1395+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1396** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1397
6ab8d72d 1398+++
f6499c03 1399** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1400containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1401expression from that list, are not checked.
1402
5d94f558
SS
1403** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1404When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1405and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1406the buffer, just like for the local files.
1407
dc28878c
GM
1408** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1409
df8a9f78 1410+++
95931eb1
GM
1411** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1412displays local abbrevs, only.
1413
54baed30
GM
1414** VC Changes
1415
1416VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1417easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1418Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1419to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1420changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1421`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1422version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1423each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1424file is registered in that backend.
1425
1426When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1427backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1428directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1429master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1430the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1431As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1432
1433The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1434still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1435RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1436vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1437where it doesn't make sense.)
1438
1439The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1440obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1441`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1442
1443*** General Changes
1444
1445The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1446checks are always done now.
1447
327652be 1448VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1449operations.
1450
1451*** Changes for CVS
1452
1453There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1454default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1455remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1456by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1457regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1458that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1459queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1460
1461If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1462repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1463If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1464commit, you can either use C-u C-x v m to perform an update on the
1465current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1466entire directory tree.
1467
1468The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1469"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1470is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1471"watched" by other developers.)
1472
1473*** Lisp Changes in VC
1474
1475VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1476add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1477library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1478then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1479a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1480provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1481of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1482you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1483`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1484
a933dad1
DL
1485** New modes and packages
1486
4473cdd9
JW
1487+++
1488*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1489implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1490It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1491functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1492history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1493will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1494the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1495rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1496all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1497
ff332647 1498+++
90cbf47e
GM
1499*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1500intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1501typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1502on certain projects.
1503
894ca69e 1504+++
90cbf47e 1505*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1506regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1507
d96d6bb0 1508 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1509
1510will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1511face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1512typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1513Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1514appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1515current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1516corresponding file is read.
1517
424d8b44 1518+++
d96d6bb0 1519*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1520Emacs is idle.
1521
31fc5d15
GM
1522*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1523parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1524
5cb6a58e
SM
1525*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1526package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1527be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1528
424d8b44 1529+++
578979ee
GM
1530*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1531facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1532separate Texinfo file.
1533
424d8b44
DL
1534+++
1535*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1536by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1537provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1538`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1539enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1540
424d8b44 1541+++
6abca616
EZ
1542*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1543without invoking external programs.
1544
1545The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1546and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1547`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1548is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1549Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1550
1551The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1552page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1553
719e2c6e 1554+++
5e5dff44
GM
1555*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1556authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1557
1558The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1559the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1560the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1561Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1562even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1563single step.
1564
1565On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1566matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1567probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1568contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1569
424d8b44 1570+++
f7136ee8
GM
1571*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1572unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1573actually modifying content of a buffer.
1574
bbd9b566
GM
1575*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1576PostScript.
1577
1578Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1579
1580The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1581
1582 ; comment (until end of line)
1583 A non-terminal
1584 "C" terminal
1585 ?C? special
1586 $A default non-terminal
1587 $"C" default terminal
1588 $?C? default special
1589 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1590 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1591 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1592 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1593 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1594 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1595 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1596 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1597 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1598 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1599 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1600 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1601 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1602 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1603 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1604
1605Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1606
99453a38
GM
1607*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1608align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1609determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1610example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1611equal signs of assignments.
1612
424d8b44 1613+++
559cee90
DL
1614*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1615paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1616
424d8b44 1617+++
6448a6b3
GM
1618*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1619list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1620buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1621customize the package.
1622
6344985d
GM
1623*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1624
249652b1
GM
1625*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1626replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1627is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1628and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1629not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1630which answers different needs.
1631
424d8b44 1632+++
3476b54a
GM
1633*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1634suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1635expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1636course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1637reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1638to be enabled.
1639
424d8b44 1640+++
8964fec7
SM
1641*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1642containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1643
424d8b44 1644+++
a933dad1
DL
1645*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1646
424d8b44 1647+++
a933dad1
DL
1648*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1649
1650*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1651
8901d1ac
GM
1652Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1653`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1654disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1655`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1656displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1657and background colors.
1658
a933dad1
DL
1659*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1660Pascal) language.
1661
f6499c03 1662+++
a933dad1
DL
1663*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1664the text at point.
1665
1666*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1667
424d8b44 1668+++
8d54eb69
DL
1669*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1670
a933dad1
DL
1671*** whitespace.el ???
1672
ebcfda83
GM
1673*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1674files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1675(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1676interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1677often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1678uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1679codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1680
1681*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1682
1683Here is an example of columns:
1684
1685horse apple bus
1686dog pineapple car EXTRA
1687porcupine strawberry airplane
1688
1689Doing the following settings:
1690
1691 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1692 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1693 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1694 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1695
1696
1697Selecting the lines above and typing:
1698
1699 M-x delimit-columns-region
1700
1701It results:
1702
1703[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1704[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1705[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1706
1707delim-col has the following options:
1708
1709 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1710 before all columns.
1711
1712 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1713 between each column.
1714
1715 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1716 after all columns.
1717
1718 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1719 each column.
1720
1721delim-col has the following commands:
1722
1723 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1724 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1725
424d8b44 1726+++
f507826c 1727*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1728were operated on recently.
1729
1730M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1731
31fc5d15
GM
1732M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1733recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1734
31fc5d15
GM
1735M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1736filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1737file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1738
31fc5d15
GM
1739- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1740- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1741- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1742
31fc5d15
GM
1743The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1744dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1745
8062f458
DL
1746*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1747text.
1748
424d8b44 1749+++
36e24b82 1750*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1751of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1752specific to Message mode.
1753
424d8b44 1754+++
36e24b82
DL
1755*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1756viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1757with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1758
424d8b44 1759+++
aaa659ef
DL
1760*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1761interface to access directory servers using different directory
1762protocols. It has a separate manual.
1763
eee54b0e
DL
1764*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1765for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1766
424d8b44 1767+++
612839b6
GM
1768*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1769
5d94f558 1770*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1771minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1772
399da7e3
DL
1773*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1774with the diary features.
1775
6e417ca5
DL
1776*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1777numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1778
4a27bdfb
GM
1779*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1780Fill mode.
1781
60dd7e0e
DL
1782*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1783Gnus facilities.
1784
a18a342d
DL
1785*** pcomplete.el ??
1786
a933dad1
DL
1787** Withdrawn packages
1788
1789*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1790functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1791
3261c1d8
DL
1792*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1793
1794*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1795
1796\f
1797* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1798(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1799
6bc92b2e
GM
1800** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
1801deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
1802being deleted.
1803
39e776cd
SM
1804** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
1805
a18a342d 1806+++
1396138a 1807** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
1808If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
1809skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
1810with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
1811C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
1812charset.
1813
4fbdfdcf
MB
1814+++
1815** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
1816the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
1817message.
1818
6a0b0752
MB
1819** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
1820expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
1821
47e351a3
GM
1822** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1823with the more general `:mask' property.
1824
ba9eeda1
GM
1825** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1826
a2bd77b8
GM
1827** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1828backslash.
1829
424d8b44
DL
1830+++
1831** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1832is running in batch mode. For example,
1833
1834 (message "%s" (read t))
1835
1836will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1837to standard output.
1838
1839+++
1840** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1841`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1842
ead53494
GM
1843** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1844will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1845frame or window.
1846
f6499c03 1847+++
27848c01
GM
1848** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1849were added
1850
1851- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1852
1853Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1854a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1855
1856- Function: remq ELT LIST
1857
1858Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1859comparison is done with `eq'.
1860
1861** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1862
b548072f
GM
1863** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1864has been changed.
1865
424d8b44 1866+++
07b14857
KH
1867** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1868without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1869convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1870
9662da0b
GM
1871** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1872or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1873
7fce7efb
DL
1874** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1875function was declared obsolete.
1876
5d94f558 1877** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1878retained as an alias).
1879
f98d3086
SM
1880** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1881It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1882is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1883
87efd256
GM
1884** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1885
1886- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1887
1888Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1889MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1890
67c9a1d2
GM
1891** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1892
1893- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1894
1895Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1896
1897This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1898calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1899argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1900value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1901returned.
1902
1903Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1904if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1905it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1906minibuffer even if it is active.
1907
1908Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1909counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1910too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1911and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1912`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1913entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1914
1915ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1916ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1917ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1918ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1919ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1920If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1921Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1922
ead53494
GM
1923** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1924event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1925argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1926
25fa6deb
GM
1927** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1928call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1929message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1930Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1931
5d94f558 1932** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1933meaning no limit.
1934
5d94f558 1935** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1936coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1937DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1938
80c05bd3 1939** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1940of a primitive.
1941
80c05bd3
DL
1942** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1943buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1944This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1945than replacing the local map.
1946
4bc7a543
DL
1947** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1948after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1949
1950** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1951
f6499c03 1952+++
f0298744
DL
1953** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1954promised long ago.
1955
5d94f558 1956** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1957\f
1958* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1959
1960Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1961--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1962When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1963so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1964
85c75536
MB
1965*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1966buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1967the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1968restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1969
0b8a3a6d
DL
1970*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1971`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1972when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1973multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1974
1975*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1976`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1977contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1978
1979*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1980changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1981[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1982regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1983the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1984extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1985bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1986eight-bit-graphic.
1987
1988** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1989
1990A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1991a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1992character set as previously.
1993
1994*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1995They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1996modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1997
1998CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1999characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2000range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2001case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2002
2003FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2004name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2005
2006*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2007registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2008"fontset-default".
2009
2010*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2011argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2012
2013** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2014composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2015buffers and strings.
2016
2017*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2018character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2019code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2020have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2021composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2022composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2023The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2024also been deleted.
2025
2026*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2027specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2028`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2029
2030*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2031MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2032composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2033may differ between buffer and string text.
2034
2035*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2036COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2037
2038*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2039directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2040Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2041`composition' from STRING.
2042
2043*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2044a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2045
2046*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2047obsolete.
2048
2049** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
2050Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
2051character set is not used.
2052
2053** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2054`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2055X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2056
2057+++
2058** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2059are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 20600xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2061
399da7e3 2062+++
f0124b4a
DL
2063** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2064that offset in the file before writing.
2065
f98d3086
SM
2066** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2067compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2068
612839b6
GM
2069** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2070`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2071from which the command was issued.
2072
2073** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2074`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2075`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2076additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2077operate on.
2078
271b4185
GM
2079** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2080to `window-buffer-height'.
2081
2082- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2083
2084Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2085The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2086lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2087
2088Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2089respectively.
2090
2091If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2092COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2093
2094The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2095obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2096on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2097
2098Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2099buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2100possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2101is currently displayed in some window.
2102
3c30cb6e
DL
2103** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2104argument function's results.
2105
62f20204
GM
2106** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2107signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2108
c0510d27 2109** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2110header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2111
2112** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2113ignores differences in case and text representation.
2114
2115** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2116cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2117as follows:
2118
2119 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2120 nil don't display a cursor
2121 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2122 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2123 others display a box cursor.
2124
9a0dd3dc
GM
2125** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2126an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2127defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2128set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2129
d7b511c4 2130** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2131specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2132the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2133text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2134
2135Example:
2136
2137 (string-to-syntax "()")
2138 => (4 . 41)
2139
1fa28578
GM
2140** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2141other than 10.
2142
2143*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2144INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2145
5d94f558 2146 #b1111
1fa28578 2147 => 15
5d94f558 2148 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2149 => -15
2150
2151*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2152
5d94f558 2153 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2154 => 438
2155
2156*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2157
5d94f558 2158 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2159 => 48815
2160
2161*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2162
5d94f558 2163 #2R-111
1fa28578 2164 => -7
5d94f558 2165 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2166 => 267
2167
3d4ff2dd 2168** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2169the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2170and isn't a string.
2171
3d4ff2dd
GM
2172** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2173a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2174value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2175not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2176
16ce590d
DL
2177+++
2178** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2179
73825616 2180** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2181for a regexp in a string.
2182
2183** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2184`mouse-position-function'.
2185
723e779c
GM
2186** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2187that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2188
d1e103b2
GM
2189** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2190Keywords are now always considered constants.
2191
31047e0d
DL
2192+++
2193** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2194returns it.
2195
7a85e4df
GM
2196** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2197returned by function `recent-keys'.
2198
02b14400
RS
2199+++
2200** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2201can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2202Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2203etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2204mode.
404fa7d6 2205
02b14400 2206+++
8964fec7
SM
2207** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2208and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2209
02b14400
RS
2210+++
2211** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2212has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2213function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2214returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2215been performed."
2216
2217When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2218and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2219hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2220then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2221
02b14400 2222+++
81da8b32
GM
2223** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2224In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2225and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2226
02b14400 2227+++
9e207b90
GM
2228** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2229with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2230specified table.
2231
2232 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2233
2234Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2235TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2236saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2237what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2238
02b14400 2239+++
d7f89643 2240** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2241Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2242
02b14400 2243+++
dde9e75a
GM
2244** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2245removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2246
02b14400 2247+++
9da30515
GM
2248** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2249instead of being optional.
2250
02b14400 2251+++
d20679eb
GM
2252** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2253modify read-only text.
2254
02b14400 2255+++
fbc164de
PE
2256** New functions and variables for locales.
2257
2258The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2259decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2260time functions like strftime. The new variables
2261`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2262locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2263
2264The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2265environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2266the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2267environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2268not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2269`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2270`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2271
02b14400 2272+++
863476d1
SM
2273** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2274To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2275modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2276start sequences.
2277
02b14400 2278+++
ef6d912c
GM
2279** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2280because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2281
02b14400 2282+++
a933dad1
DL
2283** New function `propertize'
2284
2285The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2286strings with text properties.
2287
2288- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2289
2290Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2291by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2292PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2293specified value of that property. Example:
2294
2295 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2296
2297+++
2298** push and pop macros.
2299
02b14400
RS
2300Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2301are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2302as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2303
2304(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2305(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2306 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2307
02b14400
RS
2308** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2309
6c7fd5aa
RS
2310Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2311are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2312
2313(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2314 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2315 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2316 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2317
2318(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2319 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2320 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2321 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2322
a933dad1
DL
2323+++
2324** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2325as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2326
2327[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2328[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2329[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2330[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2331[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2332 space, and DEL.
2333[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2334 and DEL.
2335[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2336 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2337 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2338[:alpha:] matches letters.
2339 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2340 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2341[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2342[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2343[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2344[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2345 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2346 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2347[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2348[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2349[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2350
2351+++
2352** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2353
2354The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2355
2356- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2357
2358The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2359are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2360
2361:test TEST
2362
2363TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2364Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2365it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2366
2367:size SIZE
2368
2369SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2370many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2371
2372:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2373
2374REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2375full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2376size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
23771.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2378old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2379
2380:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2381
2382THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2383hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2384(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2385
2386:weakness WEAK
2387
b548072f
GM
2388WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2389`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2390`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2391collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2392outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2393
2394- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2395
2396Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2397
2398- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2399
2400Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2401
2402- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2403
2404Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2405values are shared.
2406
2407- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2408
2409Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2410
2411- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2412
2413Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2414
2415- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2416
2417Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2418
2419- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2420
2421Returns the size of TABLE.
2422
d96d6bb0 2423- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2424
2425Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2426
2427- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2428
2429Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2430
2431- Function: clrhash TABLE
2432
2433Clear TABLE.
2434
2435- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2436
2437Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2438not found.
2439
79214ddf 2440- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2441
2442Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2443another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2444
2445- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2446
2447Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2448
2449- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2450
2451Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2452arguments KEY and VALUE.
2453
2454- Function: sxhash OBJ
2455
2456Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2457
2458- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2459
2460Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2461a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2462comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2463and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2464of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2465
2466TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2467
2468HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2469code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2470integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2471
2472Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2473be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2474
2475 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2476 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2477
2478 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2479 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2480
79214ddf 2481 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2482 'case-fold-string-hash))
2483
2484 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2485
2486+++
2487** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2488
2489It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2490circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2491a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2492
2493+++
2494** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2495
2496If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2497#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2498
a933dad1
DL
2499+++
2500** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2501t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2502specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2503is too short to reach that column.
2504
2505+++
2506** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2507now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2508after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2509two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2510
2511If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2512perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2513and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2514
2515+++
2516** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2517to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2518
2519+++
2520** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2521calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2522
2523+++
2524** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2525directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2526small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2527small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2528temporary-file-directory instead.
2529
2530+++
2531** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2532the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2533`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2534hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2535
2536+++
2537** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2538elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2539
2540+++
2541** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2542
2543make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2544creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2545ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2546
2547+++
2548** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2549
2550The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2551on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2552is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2553never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2554ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2555overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2556
2557If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2558that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2559to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2560The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2561
2562+++
2563** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2564
2565Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2566If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2567ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2568result string.
2569
2570Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2571string where arguments appear in the result string.
2572
2573Example:
2574
2575 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2576 (s2 "world"))
2577 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2578 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2579 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2580
2581results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2582
2583+++
2584** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2585
2586Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2587The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2588argument in it.
2589
2590 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2591 (arg "world"))
2592 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2593 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2594 (message msg arg))
2595
2596+++
2597** Sound support
2598
2599Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2600(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2601
2602Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2603(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2604to enable sound support.
2605
2606Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2607list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2608when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2609functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2610sound to play, before playing the sound.
2611
2612The following sound properties are supported:
2613
2614- `:file FILE'
2615
2616FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2617searched relative to `data-directory'.
2618
6fb40beb
GM
2619- `:data DATA'
2620
2621DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2622may be present, but not both.
2623
a933dad1
DL
2624- `:volume VOLUME'
2625
2626VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
26270..1. This property is optional.
2628
2629Other properties are ignored.
2630
2631** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2632
2633** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2634a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2635
2636** Changes to garbage collection
2637
2638*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2639of live and free strings.
2640
2641*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2642strings that have been consed so far.
2643
a933dad1 2644\f
04545643
GM
2645* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2646Lisp Manual
2647
82a452c8
GM
2648*** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
2649
9a8d84ca
DL
2650+++
2651** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2652
2653** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2654image.
2655
2656- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2657
2658Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2659
2660SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2661measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2662character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2663font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2664FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2665
ebb8f116
GM
2666** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2667has a mask bitmap.
2668
2669- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2670
2671Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2672FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2673or omitted means use the selected frame.
2674
f6499c03 2675+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2676** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2677satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2678
2679+++
2680** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2681optional.
2682
f6499c03
DL
2683+++
2684** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2685below).
04545643
GM
2686
2687\f
a933dad1
DL
2688* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2689
2690Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2691--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2692When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2693so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2694
f6d3257b
GM
2695** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2696to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2697
2698Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2699text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2700is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2701your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2702laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2703just display it black instead.
2704
2705This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2706a line like
2707
2708 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2709
2710in your `.emacs'.
2711
a933dad1
DL
2712** New face implementation.
2713
2714Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2715font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2716
2717+++
2718*** New faces.
2719
2720Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2721
2722 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2723
a933dad1
DL
2724 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2725 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2726
a933dad1 2727 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2728
a933dad1 2729 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2730
a933dad1 2731 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2732
a933dad1 2733 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2734
a933dad1
DL
2735 7. Background color.
2736
2737 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2738
2739 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2740
2741 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2742
2743 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2744
2745 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2746 color.
2747
2748 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2749 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2750
2751Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2752same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2753frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2754faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2755with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2756attributes mentioned above.
2757
2758There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2759definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2760created frames.
79214ddf 2761
a933dad1
DL
2762A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2763have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2764`fully-specified'.
2765
2766+++
2767*** Face merging.
2768
2769The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2770combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2771aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2772properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2773that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2774results in a fully-specified face.
2775
2776+++
2777*** Face realization.
2778
2779After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2780merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2781realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2782available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2783face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2784cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2785
2786Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2787character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2788for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2789charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2790
2791Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2792specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2793being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2794the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2795statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2796
2797In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2798`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
27990x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2800the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2801initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2802Emacs.
2803
2804Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2805`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2806registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2807with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2808
2809++++
2810**** Clearing face caches.
2811
2812The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2813on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2814unused fonts.
2815
2816+++
2817*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2818
a933dad1
DL
2819Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2820given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2821for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2822
2823If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2824pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2825family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2826property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2827an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2828
2829Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2830against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2831match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2832
2833Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2834
2835The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2836attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2837face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2838names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2839that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2840width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2841to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2842
2843Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2844specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2845face doesn't exist.
2846
2847+++
2848**** Scalable fonts
2849
2850Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2851since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2852servers.
2853
2854To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2855`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2856scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2857Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2858scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2859that list. Example:
2860
2861 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2862
2863allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2864
2865+++
2866*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2867
2868- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2869
2870Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2871is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2872string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2873
2874If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2875the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2876FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2877POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2878SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2879These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2880if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2881REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2882the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2883of the face font sort order.
2884
79214ddf 2885- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2886
2887Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2888omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2889(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2890non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2891
2892- Variable: font-list-limit
2893
2894Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2895won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2896matching font. The default is currently 100.
2897
2898+++
2899*** Setting face attributes.
2900
2901For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2902with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2903implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2904`face-attribute'.
2905
2906Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2907symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2908
2909The following attributes are recognized:
2910
2911`:family'
2912
2913VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2914or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2915and `?' are allowed.
2916
2917`:width'
2918
2919VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2920It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2921`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2922`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2923
2924`:height'
2925
787345ff
MB
2926VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
2927in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
2928scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
2929height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
2930
2931`:weight'
2932
2933VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2934symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2935`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2936
2937`:slant'
2938
2939VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2940symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2941`reverse-oblique'.
2942
2943`:foreground', `:background'
2944
2945VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2946
2947`:underline'
2948
2949VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2950VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2951a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2952don't underline.
2953
2954`:overline'
2955
2956VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2957VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2958string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2959overline.
2960
2961`:strike-through'
2962
2963VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2964striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2965face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2966is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2967
2968`:box'
2969
2970VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2971around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2972VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2973of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2974and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2975VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2976:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2977the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2978specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2979defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2980the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2981color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2982should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2983like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2984that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2985the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2986box.
2987
2988`:inverse-video'
2989
2990VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2991inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2992
2993`:stipple'
2994
2995If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2996The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2997searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2998HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2999is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3000explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3001
3002For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3003and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3004
3005`:font'
3006
3007Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3008XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3009is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3010versions of Emacs.
3011
3012For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3013be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3014must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3015
3016Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3017`defface'.
3018
787345ff
MB
3019`:inherit'
3020
3021VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3022of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3023like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3024
a933dad1
DL
3025*** Face attributes and X resources
3026
3027The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3028from X resources:
3029
3030 Face attribute X resource class
3031-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3032 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3033 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3034 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3035 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3036 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3037 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3038 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3039 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3040 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3041 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3042 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3043 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3044 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3045 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3046 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3047 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3048 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3049 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3050 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3051
3052+++
3053*** Text property `face'.
3054
3055The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3056specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3057specification can be
3058
30591. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3060
30612. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3062 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3063 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3064 for face attribute names.
3065
30663. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3067 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3068 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3069
3070+++
3071** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3072
acf3ecb7
EZ
3073The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3074on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3075the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3076default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3077`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3078used to clear the mapping table.
3079
acf3ecb7
EZ
3080** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3081
3082The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3083and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3084type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3085color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3086display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3087old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3088`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3089compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3090should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3091modify their color-related behavior.
3092
3093The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3094any frame type.
3095
8a5719f0
EZ
3096** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3097
3098The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3099`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3100`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3101`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3102`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3103`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3104display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3105the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3106platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3107
a933dad1
DL
3108+++
3109** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3110
463cac2d 3111This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
3112
3113The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3114end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3115Otherwise, it returns zero.
3116
463cac2d
GM
3117** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3118
3119There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3120buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3121property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3122
9a9dfda8 3123Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3124forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3125to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3126not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3127commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3128boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3129`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3130functions.
463cac2d
GM
3131
3132Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3133a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3134editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3135
9a9dfda8
GM
3136The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3137
59927f88 3138- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3139
3140Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3141
9a9dfda8
GM
3142A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3143If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3144constrained position if that is is different.
3145
3146If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3147positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3148ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3149constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3150as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3151is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3152fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3153the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3154also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3155
3156If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3157NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3158unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3159C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3160only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3161
59927f88
MB
3162If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3163a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3164
3165Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3166
3167- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3168
59927f88 3169Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3170A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3171If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3172
3173- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3174
3175Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3176A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3177If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3178If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3179field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3180
3181- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3182
3183Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3184A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3185If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3186If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3187then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3188
3189- Function: field-string &optional POS
3190
3191Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3192A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3193If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3194
3195- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3196
3197Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3198A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3199If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3200
a933dad1
DL
3201+++
3202** Image support.
3203
3204Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3205strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3206(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3207replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3208
3209If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3210`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3211AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3212window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3213area.
3214
3215IMAGE is an image specification.
3216
3217*** Image specifications
3218
3219Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3220is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3221specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3222symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3223described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3224
3225The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3226
3227`:ascent ASCENT'
3228
576da55d
GM
3229ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3230If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3231to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3232
3233If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3234image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3235
5d94f558 3236If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3237centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3238of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3239overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3240
3241`:margin MARGIN'
3242
79214ddf 3243MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3244margin around the image. Default is 0.
3245
3246`:relief RELIEF'
3247
3248RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3249around an image.
3250
3251`:algorithm ALGO'
3252
47e351a3
GM
3253Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3254
3255ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3256edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3257
3258ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3259apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3260nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3261position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3262around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3263neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3264transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3265x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3266below.
3267
3268 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3269 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3270 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3271
3272The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3273resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3274multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3275of the factors' absolute values.
3276
327652be 3277Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3278
47e351a3
GM
3279 (1 0 0
3280 0 0 0
3281 9 9 -1)
3282
3283Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3284
3285 ( 2 -1 0
3286 -1 0 1
3287 0 1 -2)
3288
ba9eeda1
GM
3289ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3290``disabled''.
3291
47e351a3
GM
3292`:mask MASK'
3293
3294If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3295the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3296image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3297background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3298image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3299the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3300GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3301image.
a933dad1 3302
47e351a3
GM
3303If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3304in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3305`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3306
3307`:file FILE'
3308
3309Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3310search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3311building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3312may be present in the image specification.
3313
518df5c4
GM
3314`:data DATA'
3315
3316Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3317supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3318present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3319support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3320
a933dad1
DL
3321*** Supported image types
3322
b246b1f6 3323**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3324
3325XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3326properties supported are
3327
3328`:foreground FG'
3329
3330FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3331is the frame's foreground.
3332
46c5af7f 3333`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3334
3335BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3336the frame's background color.
3337
3338XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3339case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3340instead of a `:file' property.
3341
3342`:width WIDTH'
3343
3344WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3345
3346`:height HEIGHT'
3347
3348HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3349
3350`:data DATA'
3351
3352DATA must be either
3353
3354 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3355 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3356
3357 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3358
3359 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3360 bitmap.
3361
c76e04a8
GM
3362 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3363 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3364 in the file.
3365
a933dad1
DL
3366**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3367
3368XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3369`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3370found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3371`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3372
3373Additional image properties supported are:
3374
3375`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3376
3377SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3378name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3379name.
3380
3381XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3382add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3383
a933dad1
DL
3384The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3385to display compressed images.
3386
3387**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3388
3389PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3390mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3391mono images are
3392
3393`:foreground FG'
3394
3395FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3396is the frame's foreground.
3397
3398`:background FG'
3399
3400BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3401the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3402
3403**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3404
3405Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3406package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3407are:
3408
a933dad1
DL
3409**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3410
3411Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3412package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3413properties defined.
3414
3415**** GIF, image type `gif'
3416
3417Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3418`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3419
3420Additional image properties supported are:
3421
3422`:index INDEX'
3423
3424INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3425multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3426
3427This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3428For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3429at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3430every 0.1 seconds.
3431
3432(defun show-anim (file max)
3433 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3434 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3435
3436(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3437 (when (= idx max)
3438 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3439 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3440 (save-excursion
3441 (set-buffer buffer)
3442 (goto-char (point-min))
3443 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3444 (insert-image img "x"))
3445 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3446
3447**** PNG, image type `png'
3448
3449Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3450package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3451properties defined.
3452
3453**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3454
3455Additional image properties supported are:
3456
3457`:pt-width WIDTH'
3458
3459WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3460integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3461
3462`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3463
3464HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3465must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3466
3467`:bounding-box BOX'
3468
3469BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3470the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3471files. This is an required property.
3472
3473Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3474lisp/gs.el.
3475
3476*** Lisp interface.
3477
79214ddf
FP
3478The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3479which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3480
3481Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3482they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3483The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3484manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3485images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3486
3487*** Simplified image API, image.el
3488
3489The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3490creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3491can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3492define an image based on available image types. The functions
3493`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3494buffer.
3495
3496+++
3497** Display margins.
3498
3499Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3500and images.
3501
3502To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3503`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3504`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3505obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3506`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3507the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3508of the display margins.
3509
3510You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3511containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3512one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3513string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3514in this file).
3515
3516+++
3517** Help display
3518
3519Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3520moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3521`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3522that have a `help-echo' property.
3523
9662da0b 3524If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3525is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3526the window in which the help was found.
3527
3528If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3529`help-echo' text property was found.
3530
3531If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3532POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3533
3534If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3535the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3536mouse.
d5aa31d8 3537
9662da0b
GM
3538If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3539string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3540
3541For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3542determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3543property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3544For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3545used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3546
3547The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3548the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3549causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3550
3551+++
3552** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3553
3554The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3555This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3556
3557The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3558scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3559The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3560scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3561used.
3562
79214ddf
FP
3563 (global-set-key [A-down]
3564 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3565 (interactive)
79214ddf 3566 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3567 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3568 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3569 #'(lambda ()
3570 (interactive)
79214ddf 3571 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3572 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3573
3574+++
3575** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3576
3577Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3578when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3579variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3580is called with one argument, POS.
3581
3582At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3583characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3584as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3585property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3586`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3587
3588+++
3589** Tool bar support.
3590
3591Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3592parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3593controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3594suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3595`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3596automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3597
3598*** Tool bar item definitions
3599
3600Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3601`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3602where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3603
a933dad1
DL
3604CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3605evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3606the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3607property (see below).
79214ddf 3608
a933dad1
DL
3609BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3610binding are currently ignored.
3611
3612The following properties are recognized:
3613
3614`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3615
a933dad1
DL
3616FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3617or disabled.
79214ddf 3618
a933dad1 3619`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3620
a933dad1 3621FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3622
a933dad1
DL
3623`:filter FUNCTION'
3624
3625FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3626FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3627used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3628
a933dad1
DL
3629`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3630
3631TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3632and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3633
a933dad1
DL
3634`:image IMAGES'
3635
3636IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3637image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3638meaning of each of the four elements:
3639
3640 Index Use when item is
3641 ----------------------------------------
3642 0 enabled and selected
3643 1 enabled and deselected
3644 2 disabled and selected
3645 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3646
4ba7246d
GM
3647If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3648algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3649
a933dad1 3650`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3651
a933dad1
DL
3652Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3653is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3654
dab96841 3655The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3656toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3657to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3658menu bar.
dab96841 3659
a933dad1
DL
3660*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3661
3662If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3663resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3664than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3665
79214ddf 3666If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3667raised when the mouse moves over them.
3668
3669You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3670`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3671pixels. Default is 1.
3672
3673You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3674`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3675
3676*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3677
3678You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3679a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3680
3681 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3682 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3683 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3684
3685is the original tool bar item definition, then
3686
3687 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3688
3689makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3690item.
3691
3692** Mode line changes.
3693
3694+++
3695*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3696
3697The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3698that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3699a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3700
37011. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3702a `local-map' text property.
3703
37042. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3705that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3706
37073. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3708is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3709`local-map' property.
3710
3711The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3712properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3713example.
3714
54522c9f
GM
3715*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3716evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3717
a933dad1
DL
3718+++
3719*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3720variable mode-line-format to nil.
3721
3722+++
3723*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3724
3725This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3726`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3727completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3728`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3729line.
3730
3731The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3732`header-line'.
3733
3734The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3735position in the header-line.
3736
3737+++
3738** Text property `display'
3739
623a0aae
GM
3740The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3741replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3742also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3743the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3744below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3745
623a0aae
GM
3746*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3747
3748To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3749text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3750
3751If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3752marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3753the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3754is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3755simpler form STRING as property value.
3756
a933dad1
DL
3757*** Variable width and height spaces
3758
3759To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3760specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3761`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3762area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3763marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3764displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3765simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3766
3767The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3768PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3769properties described below.
3770
3771The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3772characters having the `display' property.
3773
3774- :width WIDTH
3775
3776Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3777character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3778
3779- :relative-width FACTOR
3780
3781Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3782first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3783same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3784width of that character by FACTOR.
3785
3786- :align-to HPOS
3787
3788Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3789value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3790
3791Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3792
3793- :height HEIGHT
3794
3795Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3796normal line height.
3797
3798- :relative-height FACTOR
3799
3800The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3801of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3802
3803- :ascent ASCENT
3804
3805Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3806used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3807baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3808equal to 100.
3809
3810You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3811
3812*** Images
3813
3814A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3815. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3816in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3817their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3818the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3819`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3820area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3821the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3822as display specification.
3823
3824*** Other display properties
3825
3826- :space-width FACTOR
3827
3828Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3829should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3830integer or float.
3831
3832- :height HEIGHT
3833
3834Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3835
3836If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3837means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3838the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3839``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3840a font is available counts as a step.
3841
3842If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3843as tall as the frame's default font.
3844
3845If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3846height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3847
3848Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3849`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3850
3851- :raise FACTOR
3852
3853FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3854font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3855raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3856amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3857`:height' subproperty.
3858
3859*** Conditional display properties
3860
3861All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3862has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3863applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3864During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3865the text having the `display' property.
3866
3867The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3868`(:when t SPEC)'.
3869
3870+++
3871** New menu separator types.
3872
3873Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3874item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3875treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3876to specify other menu separator types.
3877
3878- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3879
3880No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3881separator occurs.
3882
3883- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3884
3885A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3886
3887- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3888
3889A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3890
3891- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3892
3893A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3894
3895- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3896
3897A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3898
3899- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3900
3901A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3902displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3903
3904- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3905
3906A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3907
3908- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3909
3910A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3911
3912- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3913
3914A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3915
3916- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3917
3918Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3919
3920- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3921
3922Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3923
3924- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3925
3926Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3927
3928- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3929
3930Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3931
3932Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3933the corresponding single-line separators.
3934
3935+++
3936** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3937
3938The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3939`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3940Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3941that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3942default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3943default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3944default foreground is black.
3945
3946The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3947(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3948`ScrollBarBackground').
3949
3950Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3951settings for scroll bar colors.
3952
3953+++
3954** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3955display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3956
3957---
3958** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3959starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3960on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3961line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3962the original window start.
3963
3964---
3965** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3966`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3967now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3968
3969+++
3970** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3971
3972A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3973`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3974windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3975other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3976
3977The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3978fixed-width and fixed-height.
3979
3980 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3981
3982A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3983fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3984window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3985change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3986temporarily to nil, for example
3987
3988 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3989 (enlarge-window 10))
3990
79214ddf 3991Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3992or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3993
3994** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3995terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3996to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3997overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3998horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3999support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4000
3787e12e
GM
4001
4002^L
4003* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4004
4005** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4006input.
4007
4008** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4009
4010** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4011
4012** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4013only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4014exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4015(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4016(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4017
4018** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4019been added.
4020
4021^L
4022* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4023
4024** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4025
4026^L
4027* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4028
4029** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4030M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4031\f
4032* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4033
4034** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4035
4036You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4037Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4038`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4039
4040If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4041is the one that is used.
4042
4043** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4044the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4045Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4046separate from the command's regular output.
4047Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4048says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4049In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4050the buffer name.
4051
4052When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4053output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4054it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4055cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4056
4057** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4058the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4059is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4060created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4061
4062** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4063example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4064match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4065quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4066
4067** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4068now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4069if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4070they never ignore case.
4071
4072** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4073under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4074applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4075of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4076just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4077convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4078part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4079
4080If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4081the same format that was used in the file before.
4082
4083You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4084`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4085
4086** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4087renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4088This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4089
4090** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4091The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4092buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4093your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4094is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4095end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4096Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4097
4098The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4099eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4100control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4101format. You can now customize these variables.
4102
4103** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4104filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4105filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4106enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4107
4108** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4109in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4110windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4111
4112** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4113dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4114doesn't have any effect.
4115
4116** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4117not one per buffer.
4118
4119** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4120use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4121 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4122
4123** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4124To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4125`auto-show-mode' command.
4126
4127** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4128avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4129versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4130choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4131occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4132
4133** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4134cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4135
4136** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4137character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4138feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4139
4140** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4141the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4142interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4143and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4144
4145** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4146
4147The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4148that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4149one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4150codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4151set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4152
4153Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4154from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4155
4156IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4157equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4158a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4159`?' on other systems.
4160
4161IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4162feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4163Unix.
4164
4165Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4166current codepage when it starts.
4167
4168** Mail changes
4169
4170*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4171`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4172appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4173non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4174MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4175headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4176latin-1:
4177
4178 MIME-version: 1.0
4179 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4180 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4181
4182*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4183default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4184default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4185sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4186buffer-file-coding-system.
4187
4188You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4189sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4190mail.
4191
4192*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4193if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4194Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4195list of possible coding systems.
4196
4197** CC Mode changes
4198
4199*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4200modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4201longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4202docstring for details.
4203
4204*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4205symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4206found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4207prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4208lineup functions use this feature currently.
4209
4210*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4211"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4212
4213*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4214"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4215
4216*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4217from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4218symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4219c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4220anonymous classes.
4221
4222*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4223syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4224
4225*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4226inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4227support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4228function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4229
4230*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4231(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4232brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4233c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4234(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4235
4236*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4237
4238*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4239
4240*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4241for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4242
4243*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4244
4245*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4246associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4247This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4248circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4249class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4250
4251** Gnus changes.
4252
4253*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4254added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4255Gnus manual for the full story.
4256
4257*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4258before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4259group, which is created automatically.
4260
4261*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4262values.
4263
4264*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4265
4266*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4267outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4268
4269*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4270`C-u C-c C-c'.
4271
4272*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4273
4274*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4275re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4276
4277*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4278
4279*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4280Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4281
4282*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4283`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4284
4285*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4286control over simplification.
4287
4288*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4289
4290*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4291limit.
4292
4293*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4294
4295*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4296
4297*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4298If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4299rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4300
4301*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4302`a' forces normal posting method.
4303
4304*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4305-- `W d'.
4306
4307*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4308to a non-nil value.
4309
4310*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4311where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4312
4313*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4314has been added.
4315
4316*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4317
4318*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4319
4320*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4321`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4322
4323*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4324`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4325
4326*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4327
4328*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4329been added.
4330
4331*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4332`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4333
4334*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4335updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4336
4337*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4338
4339*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4340
4341*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4342
4343** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4344
4345*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4346options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4347nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4348
4349*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4350TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4351of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4352TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4353can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4354
4355*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4356All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4357but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4358the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4359
4360*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4361the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4362buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4363mismatch.
4364
4365** Changes to RefTeX mode
4366
4367*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4368file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4369
4370*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4371lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4372characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4373removed from the label.
4374
4375*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4376a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4377
4378*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4379customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4380
4381*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4382`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4383expressions.
4384
4385*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4386
4387** New/deleted modes and packages
4388
4389*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4390SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4391
4392*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4393editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4394SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4395
4396*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4397changes with a special face.
4398
4399*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4400this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4401Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4402\f
4403* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4404
4405** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4406This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4407conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4408and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4409check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4410
4411The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4412Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4413distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4414
4415** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4416MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4417controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4418directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4419Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4420on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4421string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4422program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4423printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4424
4425** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4426output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4427available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4428input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4429temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4430program.
4431
4432An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4433and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4434programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4435automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4436as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4437ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4438
4439** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4440a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4441MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4442was not documented clearly before.
4443
4444** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4445This includes Tetris and Snake.
4446\f
4447* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4448
4449** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4450return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4451They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4452meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4453
4454** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4455WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4456and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4457
4458** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4459
4460*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4461It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4462
4463*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4464the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4465integers.
4466
4467** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4468files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4469arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4470file names and attributes are returned.
4471
4472** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4473sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4474accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4475It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4476returns the result.
4477
4478** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4479to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4480
4481** New functions for base64 conversion:
4482
4483The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4484into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4485performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4486optionally.
4487
4488Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4489job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4490
4491**
4492The new function process-running-child-p
4493will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4494terminal to its own child process.
4495
4496** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4497when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4498to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4499itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4500
4501** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4502be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4503
4504** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4505:included is an alias for :visible.
4506
4507easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4508easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4509to move or copy menu entries.
4510
4511** Multibyte editing changes
4512
4513*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4514an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4515make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4516work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4517char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4518 (setq char (sref str idx)
4519 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4520The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4521
4522If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4523(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4524 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4525
4526*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4527region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4528deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4529
4530 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4531
4532This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4533across the boundary.
4534
4535*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4536`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4537 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4538 contains 8-bit characters.
4539 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4540 contains invalid characters.
4541
4542*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4543text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4544preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4545text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4546way.
4547
4548*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4549If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4550end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4551prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4552
4553*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4554compose Thai characters in a string.
4555
4556** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4557argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4558for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4559menus should always use the third argument.
4560
4561** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4562read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4563arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4564input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4565
4566** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4567of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4568programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4569inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4570
4571** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4572the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4573returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4574echo area contents.
4575
4576 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4577
4578** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4579NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4580requested feature cannot be loaded.
4581
4582** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4583foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4584means to clear out that attribute.
4585
4586** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4587gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4588
4589** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4590read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4591unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4592end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4593
4594** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4595the gap of the current buffer.
4596
4597** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4598to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4599current buffer.
4600
4601** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4602facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4603These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4604it back in after any modifications have been made.
4605\f
4606* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4607
4608** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4609the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4610/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4611directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4612subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4613
4614Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4615names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4616Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4617which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4618these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4619
4620Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4621starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4622time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4623
4624This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4625Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4626to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4627subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4628`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4629results.
4630
4631** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4632GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4633that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4634fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4635\f
4636* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4637
4638** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4639including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4640it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4641perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4642
4643** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4644specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4645region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4646further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4647command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4648within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4649are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4650region.
4651
4652In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4653selective undo.
4654
4655** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4656unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4657buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4658effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4659Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4660
4661The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4662though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4663-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4664load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4665
4666** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4667no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4668enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4669something that most users not do.
4670
4671** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4672operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4673The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4674applications.
4675
4676C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4677pasting operations.
4678
4679** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4680setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4681like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4682printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4683`ps-printer-name'.
4684
4685** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4686minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4687any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4688except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4689incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4690hits a new word.
4691
4692Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4693Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4694to be confused by TeX commands.
4695
4696You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4697correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4698clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4699of various alternative replacements and actions.
4700
4701Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4702the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4703corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4704alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4705flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4706
4707Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4708flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4709
4710** Changes in input method usage.
4711
4712Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4713the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4714respectively.
4715
4716You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4717
4718If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4719of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4720
4721The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4722that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4723
4724 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4725
4726 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4727
4728 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4729 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4730
4731 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4732 given in the following case:
4733 o When you are using a complex input method.
4734 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4735
4736If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4737input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4738and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4739setting it to t is helpful.
4740
4741The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4742
4743In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4744keys:
4745 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4746 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4747 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4748These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4749environment.
4750
4751** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4752names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4753minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4754get
4755
4756 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4757
4758which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4759
4760Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4761Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4762
4763** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4764at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4765its owner and group.
4766
4767** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4768Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4769
4770** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4771contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4772
4773** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4774which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4775in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4776by the left edge of the rectangle.
4777
4778** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4779increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4780C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4781for writing keyboard macros.
4782
4783** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4784files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4785frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4786the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4787additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4788info.
4789
4790** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4791
4792** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4793query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4794contents only.
4795
4796** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4797confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4798the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4799says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4800
4801** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4802non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4803literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4804
4805** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4806now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4807Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4808inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4809
4810** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4811failure if the command produces no output.
4812
4813** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4814manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4815the mouse.
4816
4817** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4818mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4819function and variable names.
4820
4821** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4822reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4823file-coding-system-alist.
4824
4825** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4826t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4827converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4828the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4829according to the current fontset.
4830
4831** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4832
4833The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4834that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4835nonascii-insert-offset.
4836
4837For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4838enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4839nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4840characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4841
4842** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4843an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4844
4845** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4846letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4847
4848** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4849are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4850command keys.
4851
4852** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4853user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4854
4855Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4856user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4857all variables that have documentation.
4858
4859** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4860shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4861that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4862minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4863it should show; the default is 20.
4864
4865Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4866the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4867of your input.
4868
4869** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4870all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4871recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4872argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4873the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4874Newly added options are included as well.
4875
4876If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4877then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4878for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4879
4880This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4881Customize menu.
4882
4883** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4884the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4885
4886** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4887buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4888invoked.
4889
4890** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4891that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4892The default is 1.
4893
4894** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4895syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4896new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4897(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4898sensibly.
4899
4900** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4901
4902** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4903value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4904two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4905
4906** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4907reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4908for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4909every night.
4910
4911** Desktop changes
4912
4913*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4914the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4915
4916*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4917and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4918
4919** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4920read and post multi-lingual articles.
4921
4922** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4923doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4924be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4925outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4926the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4927made invisible again.
4928
4929** Mail reading and sending changes
4930
4931*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4932the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4933changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4934toggle.
4935
4936*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4937now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4938summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4939the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4940rmail-default-body-file.
4941
4942*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4943longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4944handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4945
4946*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4947it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4948is evaluated to insert the signature.
4949
4950*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4951outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4952handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4953putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4954transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4955especially interested in trying feedmail.
4956
4957feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4958feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4959provided by feedmail are:
4960
4961**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4962stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4963there is also a queue for draft messages
4964
4965**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4966be prompted for confirmation
4967
4968**** does smart filling of address headers
4969
4970**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4971the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4972can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4973
4974**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4975the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4976/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4977function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4978
4979** Dired changes
4980
4981*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4982files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4983
4984*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4985run Dired on the directory name at point.
4986
4987*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4988files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4989for a specified regexp.
4990
4991** VC Changes
4992
4993*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4994conveniently.
4995
4996*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4997faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4998Dired.
4999
5000VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5001directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5002listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5003currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5004
5005You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5006then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5007vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5008control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5009on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5010
5011All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5012is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5013`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5014the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5015`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5016
5017The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5018toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5019VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5020`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5021
5022Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5023ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5024command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5025
5026*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5027file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5028session to resolve them.
5029
5030Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5031resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5032contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5033uses as well).
5034
5035*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5036command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5037you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5038either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5039branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5040If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5041using ediff.
5042
5043** Changes in Font Lock
5044
5045*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5046are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5047use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5048unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5049compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5050
5051** Frame name display changes
5052
5053*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5054frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5055raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5056when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5057
5058*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5059frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5060menu.
5061
5062** Comint (subshell) changes
5063
5064*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5065subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5066with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5067
5068*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5069
5070C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5071that is, the line after the last line you got.
5072You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5073
5074C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5075send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5076the following line.
5077
5078C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5079which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5080previously sent input.
5081
5082C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5083it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5084as the search string.
5085
5086*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5087automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5088
5089** C mode changes
5090
5091*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5092and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5093assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5094definition.
5095
5096*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5097(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5098Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5099style is still the default however.
5100
5101*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5102
5103*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5104are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5105them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5106
5107*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5108and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5109
5110*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5111namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5112
5113*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5114makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5115
5116*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5117c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5118
5119*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5120should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5121package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5122variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5123
5124** Changes to hippie-expand.
5125
5126*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5127non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5128which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5129
5130*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5131non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5132expanding dynamically.
5133
5134*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5135non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5136
5137*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5138non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5139this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5140expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5141
5142*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5143
5144** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5145
5146*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5147bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5148automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5149bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5150against the first word in the title.
5151
5152*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5153capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5154bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5155lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5156lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5157bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5158
5159*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5160generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5161replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5162bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5163
5164** Changes in vcursor.el.
5165
5166*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5167and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5168variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5169entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5170`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5171in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5172
5173*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5174Editing group once the package is loaded.
5175
5176*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5177generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5178vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5179
5180*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5181vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5182
5183** Ispell changes.
5184
5185*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5186buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5187are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5188
5189*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5190A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5191and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5192defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5193include:
5194
5195 o URLs are automatically skipped
5196 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5197
5198*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5199
5200** Changes to RefTeX mode
5201
5202RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5203large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5204re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5205section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5206
5207*** New recursive parser.
5208
5209The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5210entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5211recursive parser scans the individual files.
5212
5213*** Parsing only part of a document.
5214
5215Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5216partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5217the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5218
5219 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5220
5221*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5222
5223This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5224
5225 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5226
5227*** Using multiple selection buffers
5228
5229If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5230for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5231
5232 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5233
5234*** References to external documents.
5235
5236The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5237documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5238documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5239macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5240RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5241the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5242The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5243
5244*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5245
5246The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5247and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5248
5249Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5250the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5251
5252*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5253
5254The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5255buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5256
5257*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5258
5259The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5260contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5261`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5262have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5263enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5264at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5265more.
5266
5267*** Support for the varioref package
5268
5269The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5270
5271*** New hooks
5272
5273Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5274and citations are created. These hooks are
5275`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5276`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5277
5278*** Citations outside LaTeX
5279
5280The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5281a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5282
5283*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5284
5285The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5286fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5287fontified, use
5288
5289 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5290
5291** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5292With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5293the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5294directories that contain the same file name.
5295
5296Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5297Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5298file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5299Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5300have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5301names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5302directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5303directory.
5304
5305** New modes and packages
5306
5307*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5308It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5309it, but some do not.
5310
5311*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5312code.
5313
5314*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5315current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5316around in a buffer.
5317
5318Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5319
5320*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5321uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5322be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5323established system of notation similar to Chess.
5324
5325*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5326documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5327guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5328
5329*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5330available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5331system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5332simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5333functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5334the like.
5335
5336*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5337identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5338
5339*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5340within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5341used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5342the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5343
5344*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5345
5346 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5347 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5348 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5349 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5350 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5351 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5352 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5353 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5354 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5355 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5356 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5357
5358 Platform-specific modes:
5359
5360 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5361 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5362 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5363 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5364 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5365 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5366 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5367 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5368 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5369\f
5370* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5371
5372** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5373use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5374That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5375Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5376
5377Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5378you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5379consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5380
5381** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5382and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5383specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5384searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5385
5386** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5387multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5388character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5389environment.
5390
5391** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5392take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5393string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5394current input method for reading this one event.
5395
5396** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5397now control whether to output certain characters as
5398backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5399non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5400characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5401in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5402\f
5403* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5404
5405** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5406of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5407
5408** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5409in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5410always increases point by 1.
5411
5412The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5413considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5414
5415See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5416
5417** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5418Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5419default value changed. For example,
5420
5421 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5422 :type 'integer
5423 :group 'foo
5424 :version "20.3")
5425
5426 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5427 :version "20.3")
5428
5429If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5430default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5431is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5432`:version' in the top level group.
5433
5434This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5435
5436** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5437starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5438
5439However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5440symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5441support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5442to themselves.
5443
5444If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5445this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5446values whatever.
5447
5448** There is a new debugger command, R.
5449It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5450in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5451
5452** Frame-local variables.
5453
5454You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5455the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5456local bindings for that variable.
5457
5458These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5459frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5460modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5461parameter name.
5462
5463Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5464Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5465active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5466that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5467
5468It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5469clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5470very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5471through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5472
5473** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5474"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5475evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5476makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5477See the documentation in sregex.el.
5478
5479** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5480is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5481parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5482The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5483
5484** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5485If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5486
5487** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5488known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5489define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5490
5491** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5492when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5493it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5494history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5495
5496The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5497return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5498empty input.
5499
5500** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5501for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5502`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5503Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5504`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5505
5506** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5507echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5508a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5509default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5510
5511** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5512specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5513function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5514place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5515non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5516
5517** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5518If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5519up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5520end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5521
5522** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5523which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5524If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5525
5526** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5527holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5528was directed to display this buffer.
5529
5530** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5531with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5532describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5533other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5534set-window-configuration.
5535
5536** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5537window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5538positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5539windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5540
5541** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5542override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5543look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5544
5545If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5546non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5547map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5548
5549minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5550and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5551
5552** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5553except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5554
5555** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5556USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5557floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5558
5559** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5560to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5561in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5562it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5563
5564** Menu changes
5565
5566*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5567keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5568better supported.
5569
5570The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5571a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5572you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5573can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5574then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5575
5576*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5577
5578In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5579 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5580defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5581starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5582
5583The format is:
5584 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5585 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5586where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5587string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5588The supported properties include
5589
5590:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5591 item is enabled.
5592:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5593 item should appear in the menu.
5594:filter FILTER-FN
5595 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5596 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5597 It should return a binding to use instead.
5598:keys DESCRIPTION
5599 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5600 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5601 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5602:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5603 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5604 keyboard binding.
5605:key-sequence nil
5606 This means that the command normally has no
5607 keyboard equivalent.
5608:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5609:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5610 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5611 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5612 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5613
5614Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5615Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5616
5617(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5618
5619** New event types
5620
5621*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5622mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5623corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5624which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5625
5626 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5627
5628where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5629same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5630indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5631negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5632the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5633forward, away from the user.
5634
5635As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5636
5637*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5638files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5639and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5640filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5641loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5642
5643 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5644
5645where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5646same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5647that were dragged and dropped.
5648
5649As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5650
5651** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5652
5653*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5654any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5655to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5656
5657*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5658can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5659that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5660
5661*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5662in Emacs 19 and before.
5663
5664The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5665The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5666
5667*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5668buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5669unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5670representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5671
5672This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5673as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5674viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5675one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5676will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5677
5678This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5679representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5680(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5681consistent with the new representation.
5682
5683*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5684representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5685about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5686however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5687
5688The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5689nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5690using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5691
5692*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5693representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5694representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5695
5696The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5697loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5698is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5699
5700*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5701which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5702
5703*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5704which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5705
5706*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5707portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5708so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5709You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5710
5711*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5712it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5713
5714*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5715convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5716buffer or string being searched.
5717
5718One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5719[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5720searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5721searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5722obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5723you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5724expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5725
5726*** Structure of coding system changed.
5727
5728All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5729by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5730which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5731as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5732vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5733your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5734define-coding-system-alias.
5735
5736The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5737the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5738access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5739pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5740character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5741safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5742'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5743`iso-8859-1'.
5744
5745Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5746The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5747coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5748(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5749
5750Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5751also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5752are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5753the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5754
5755*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5756proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5757This function requires a user interaction.
5758
5759*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5760find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5761select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5762systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5763a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5764select-safe-coding-system.
5765
5766*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5767decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5768last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5769was done.
5770
5771*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5772used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5773coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5774
5775*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5776return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5777characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5778`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5779
5780*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5781coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5782coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5783converted.
5784
5785*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5786coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5787
5788*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5789character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5790character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5791each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5792either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5793range of characters.
5794
5795*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5796Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5797
5798*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5799in the current buffer at position POS.
5800
5801*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5802input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5803function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5804character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5805event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5806binding input-method-function to nil.
5807
5808The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5809method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5810input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5811the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5812not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5813
5814The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5815subsequent events of a key sequence.
5816
5817*** You can customize any language environment by using
5818set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5819
5820The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5821customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5822instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5823environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5824exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5825\f
5826* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5827
5828** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5829options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5830at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5831tree structure.
5832
5833M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5834user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5835
5836With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5837session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5838in your .emacs file.)
5839
5840** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5841You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5842
5843** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5844This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5845
5846** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5847immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5848kills the region.
5849
5850The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5851delete the character before point, as usual.
5852
5853** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5854on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5855by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5856
5857** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5858insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5859the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5860onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5861history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5862past.)
5863
5864** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5865This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5866in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5867TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5868makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5869
5870As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5871and is an alias for it.
5872
5873If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5874use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5875
5876** Scrolling changes
5877
5878*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5879position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5880
5881In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5882on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5883where it started.
5884
5885*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5886move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5887screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5888does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5889
5890*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5891top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5892comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5893recenters the window.
5894
5895** International character set support (MULE)
5896
5897Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5898including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5899Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5900Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5901features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5902MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5903
5904Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5905coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5906character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5907variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5908into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5909
5910Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5911generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5912supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5913language, to make it possible to type them.
5914
5915The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5916character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5917
5918The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5919to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5920
5921You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5922
5923 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5924
5925Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5926characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5927argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5928already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5929characters for their work until they want to change.
5930
5931*** Input methods
5932
5933An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5934specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5935has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5936the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5937support several input methods.
5938
5939The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5940another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5941work.
5942
5943A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5944characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5945composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5946consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5947sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5948letter.
5949
5950The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5951by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5952First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5953marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5954mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5955
5956None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5957they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5958phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5959converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5960
5961Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5962word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5963typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5964the first guess is wrong.
5965
5966*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5967turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5968
5969If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5970byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5971they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5972the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5973
5974However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5975use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5976includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5977translate automatically to and from either one.
5978
5979*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5980
5981Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5982file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5983sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5984what you want.
5985
5986If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5987example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5988system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5989multibyte characters in that buffer.
5990
5991If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5992character conversion as well.
5993
5994*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5995
5996A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5997Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5998requires using many fonts.
5999
6000Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6001collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6002
6003A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6004the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6005have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6006you would use a font.
6007
6008If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6009specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6010display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6011
6012The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6013(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6014characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6015or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6016and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6017
6018*** Defining fontsets.
6019
6020Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6021chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6022with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6023
6024Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6025of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6026`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6027standard fontset are created automatically.
6028
6029If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6030argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6031FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6032with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6033name is `fontset-startup'.
6034
6035Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6036The resource value should have this form:
6037 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6038FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6039 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6040 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6041 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6042The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6043of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6044CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6045FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6046
6047Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6048last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6049You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6050
6051For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6052font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6053following resource,
6054 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6055the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6056 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6057Here is the substitution rule:
6058 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6059 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6060 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6061 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6062 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6063
6064The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6065fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6066that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6067
6068With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6069like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6070name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6071fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6072fontsets.
6073
6074*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6075defaults for a particular choice of language.
6076
6077Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6078method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6079visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6080already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6081language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6082system for new files that you create.
6083
6084It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6085set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6086whole Emacs session.
6087
6088For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6089chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6090with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6091
6092*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6093specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6094specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6095the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6096coding systems that Emacs supports.
6097
6098*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6099lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6100This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6101After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6102is used for *the immediately following command*.
6103
6104So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6105write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6106
6107If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6108then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6109
6110For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6111visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6112
6113*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6114construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6115to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6116specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6117of the file.
6118
6119*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6120the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6121code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6122translated into that character code.
6123
6124This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6125various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6126
6127By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6128
6129*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6130the coding system for keyboard input.
6131
6132Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6133with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6134some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6135
6136By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6137
6138Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6139input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6140translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6141to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6142designed to work with terminals.
6143
6144*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6145specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6146This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6147has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6148translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6149in the corresponding buffer.
6150
6151By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6152
6153*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6154to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6155It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6156
6157*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6158an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6159command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6160want to use.
6161
6162C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6163method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6164
6165*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6166layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6167remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6168which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6169
6170*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6171the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6172related information.
6173
6174*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6175HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6176scripts.
6177
6178*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6179information about the support for a particular language.
6180You specify the language as an argument.
6181
6182*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6183the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6184first dash.
6185
6186A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6187(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6188whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
61891 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6190
6191 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6192 B big5 (Chinese)
6193 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6194 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6195 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6196 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6197 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6198 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6199 K euc-korea (Korean)
6200 R koi8 (Russian)
6201 Q tibetan
6202 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6203 T lao
6204 T tis620 (Thai)
6205 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6206 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6207 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6208 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6209 z hz (Chinese)
6210
6211When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6212two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6213coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6214keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6215
6216*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6217conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6218
6219When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6220into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6221rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6222Rmail files themselves.
6223
6224*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6225conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6226
6227Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6228for sending mail:
6229
6230- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6231- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6232- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6233 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6234- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6235
6236*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6237to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6238Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6239translations.
6240
6241** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6242of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6243insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6244without any conversion.
6245
6246** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6247You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6248RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6249any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6250
6251** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6252functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6253
6254Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6255Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6256
6257Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6258mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6259
6260** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6261complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6262in the buffer before point.
6263
6264With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6265symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6266you are using.
6267
6268With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6269just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6270
6271** File locking works with NFS now.
6272
6273The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6274in the same directory as FILENAME.
6275
6276This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6277works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6278can become a bottleneck.
6279
6280The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6281does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6282create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6283file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6284rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6285so useful that the change is worth while.
6286
6287When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6288are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6289collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6290tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6291
6292** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6293it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6294show-paren-mode.
6295
6296** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6297selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6298delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6299
6300** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6301within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6302complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6303
6304** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6305it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6306set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6307
6308** Changes in View mode.
6309
6310*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6311Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6312
6313*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6314view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6315
6316*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6317previous state.
6318
6319*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6320scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6321
6322*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6323non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6324not just the selected window.
6325
6326*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6327read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6328turns View mode on or off.
6329
6330*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6331how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6332delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6333
6334** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6335now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6336
6337** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6338has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6339presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6340which version to compare with.
6341
6342** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6343blocks if a match is inside the block.
6344
6345The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6346is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6347isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6348shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6349
6350By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6351of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6352blocks, all of them or none.
6353
6354** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6355current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6356confirmation first.
6357
6358** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6359now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6360However, the mode will not be changed if
6361(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6362(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6363 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6364(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6365
6366This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6367
6368However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6369these commands do not change the major mode.
6370
6371** M-x occur changes.
6372
6373*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6374it performs a case-sensitive search.
6375
6376*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6377if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6378using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6379
6380** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6381in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6382window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6383that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6384buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6385
6386** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6387after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6388appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6389come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6390
6391** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6392selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6393buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6394
6395** Outline mode changes.
6396
6397*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6398
6399*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6400
6401** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6402you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6403Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6404was already active.
6405
6406The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6407unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6408get confused by it.
6409
6410If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6411set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6412
6413** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6414
6415*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6416conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6417character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6418including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6419
6420The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6421mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6422copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6423
6424*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6425are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6426values.
6427
6428`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6429case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6430`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6431case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6432
6433** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6434certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6435can be. The default value is 30.
6436
6437** Changes in Mail mode.
6438
6439*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6440Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6441composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6442`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6443`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6444behavior.
6445
6446C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6447compose-mail-other-frame.
6448
6449*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6450the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6451replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6452buffer that shows the original message.
6453
6454*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6455with separator lines around the contents.
6456
6457*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6458in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6459definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6460need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6461
6462*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6463
6464**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6465for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6466controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6467Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6468
6469**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6470to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6471/etc/passwd.
6472
6473**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6474to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6475/etc/passwd.
6476
6477** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6478special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6479directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6480reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6481
6482Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6483when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6484be taken to be magic.
6485
6486** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6487files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6488available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6489
6490M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6491(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6492
6493** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6494suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6495
6496In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6497
6498new key dired.el binding old key
6499------- ---------------- -------
6500 * c dired-change-marks c
6501 * m dired-mark m
6502 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6503 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6504 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6505 * u dired-unmark u
6506 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6507 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6508 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6509 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6510 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6511 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6512
6513** Rmail changes.
6514
6515*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6516saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6517chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6518each time you run it.
6519
6520*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6521whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6522
6523*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6524messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6525means to move in the opposite direction.
6526
6527*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6528you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6529
6530*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6531just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6532It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6533can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6534for output.
6535
6536** Gnus changes.
6537
6538*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6539
6540*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6541Gnus.
6542
6543*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6544`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6545
6546*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6547article mode line.
6548
6549*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6550
6551*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6552
6553(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6554
6555*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6556are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6557`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6558
6559*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6560
6561*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6562
6563*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6564See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6565
6566*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6567Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6568used to pick articles.
6569
6570*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6571another have been added.
6572
6573 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6574
6575*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6576generating lines in buffers.
6577
6578*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6579`M-C-_'.
6580
6581*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6582
6583*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6584
6585 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6586
6587*** Scores can be decayed.
6588
6589 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6590
6591*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6592Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6593
6594*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6595the native server.
6596
6597 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6598
6599*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6600(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6601
6602*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6603
6604*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6605even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6606
6607*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6608(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6609
6610 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6611 a group.
6612
6613*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6614sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6615
6616 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6617
6618*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6619
6620 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6621
6622*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6623
6624 Use the `Y c' command.
6625
6626*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6627
6628*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6629
6630 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6631
6632*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6633from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6634
6635 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6636
6637*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6638
6639*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6640the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6641
6642 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6643
6644Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6645and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6646from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6647hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6648this issue.)
6649
6650Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6651automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6652particular news group. This can be done by:
6653
6654 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6655
6656Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6657of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6658"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6659system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6660for reading and posting).
6661
6662CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6663 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6664Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6665newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6666there.
6667
6668Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6669default. Here are some of these default settings:
6670
6671 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6672 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6673 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6674 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6675 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6676
6677When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6678the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6679
6680** CC mode changes.
6681
6682*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6683code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6684values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6685this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6686Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6687loaded.
6688
6689If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6690Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6691style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6692share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6693c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6694must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6695
6696*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6697of the current buffer.
6698
6699*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6700it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6701of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6702
6703*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6704style that the Python developers like.
6705
6706*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6707This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6708just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6709
6710** VC Changes [new]
6711
6712** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6713name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6714directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6715
6716This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6717master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6718developers.
6719
6720You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6721RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6722
6723*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6724other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6725writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6726calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6727
6728*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6729version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6730
6731** Calendar changes.
6732
6733A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6734of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6735for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6736
6737** ps-print changes
6738
6739There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6740
6741*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6742
6743The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6744formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6745`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6746`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6747It defaults to `letter'.
6748If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6749
6750The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6751of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6752non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6753
6754The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6755It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6756It defaults to 1.
6757
6758*** Horizontal layout
6759
6760The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6761`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6762All are measured in points.
6763
6764*** Vertical layout
6765
6766The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6767`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6768All are measured in points.
6769
6770*** Headers
6771
6772If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6773`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6774margin above the text.
6775
6776If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6777framing box is printed around the header.
6778
6779The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6780`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6781
6782The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6783`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6784`ps-header-font-size'.
6785
6786*** Font managing
6787
6788The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6789used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6790`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6791elements to this alist.
6792
6793The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6794for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6795
6796** hideshow changes.
6797
6798*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6799C++, ; for lisp).
6800
6801*** Support for java-mode added.
6802
6803*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6804in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6805
6806*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6807the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6808way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6809
6810*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6811robust and a lot faster.
6812
6813*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6814
6815*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6816to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6817documentation for more details.
6818
6819** Changes in Enriched mode.
6820
6821*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6822filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6823of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6824use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6825the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6826
6827*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6828distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6829as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6830as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6831
6832** Font Lock mode
6833
6834*** Custom support
6835
6836The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6837font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6838faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6839group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6840your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6841consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6842
6843You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6844
6845*** Maximum decoration
6846
6847Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6848default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6849of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6850supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6851to get the old behavior.
6852
6853*** New support
6854
6855Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6856
6857Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6858support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6859
6860*** Configurable support
6861
6862Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6863additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6864c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6865java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6866list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6867of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6868convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6869
6870Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6871way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6872it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6873
6874*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6875
6876You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6877highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6878for any mode.
6879
6880For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6881
6882 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6883
6884in your ~/.emacs.
6885
6886*** New faces
6887
6888Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6889font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6890distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6891to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6892
6893*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6894
6895The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6896cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6897same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6898
6899*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6900
6901The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6902according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6903the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6904non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6905refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6906the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6907Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6908
6909This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6910For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6911this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6912refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6913containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6914the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6915
6916As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6917
6918Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6919Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6920Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6921new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6922
6923If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6924settings.
6925
6926** Ada mode changes.
6927
6928*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6929If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6930procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6931you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6932stubs.
6933
6934*** There are two new commands:
6935 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6936 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6937
6938The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6939`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6940`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6941
6942*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6943is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6944Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6945
6946*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6947formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6948places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6949space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6950
6951** Scheme mode changes.
6952
6953*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6954mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6955for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6956with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6957have any effect.
6958
6959If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6960still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6961scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6962variables as buffer-local variables.
6963
6964*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6965Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6966
6967** Changes to the emacsclient program
6968
6969*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6970USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6971associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6972can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6973
6974*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6975it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6976buffer in Emacs.
6977
6978*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6979use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6980ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6981option takes precedence.
6982
6983** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6984constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6985(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6986
6987** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6988which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6989the current defun.
6990
6991** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6992following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6993
6994** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6995and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6996necessary).
6997
6998** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6999if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7000these register values no longer become completely useless.
7001If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7002asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7003it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7004
7005** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7006example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7007be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7008you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7009
7010You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7011variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7012file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7013revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7014only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7015
7016** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7017since it applies only to the current frame.
7018
7019** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7020file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7021and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7022
7023This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7024multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7025variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7026tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7027instead of just the file you are editing.
7028
7029** RefTeX mode
7030
7031RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7032and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7033different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7034multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7035turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7036
7037C-c ( reftex-label
7038 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7039 knows which kind of label is needed.
7040
7041C-c ) reftex-reference
7042 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7043 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7044
7045C-c [ reftex-citation
7046 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7047 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7048
7049C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7050 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7051
7052C-c = reftex-toc
7053 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7054 can quickly jump to every section.
7055
7056Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7057commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7058Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7059reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7060C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7061
7062** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7063
7064*** Info documentation is now available.
7065
7066*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7067both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7068
7069*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7070bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7071
7072*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7073(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7074
7075*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7076entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7077appropriate functions.
7078
7079*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7080entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7081
7082*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7083been cleaned.
7084
7085*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7086bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7087
7088*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7089shall be delimited.
7090
7091*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7092bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7093bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7094
7095*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7096field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7097prefixed with `ALT'.
7098
7099*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7100bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7101formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7102documentation).
7103
7104*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7105documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7106for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7107
7108*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7109comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7110
7111*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7112alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7113signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7114
7115*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7116
7117*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7118
7119*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7120from alien sources.
7121
7122*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7123to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7124crossref entries.
7125
7126*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7127region.
7128
7129*** Added support for imenu.
7130
7131*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7132of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7133`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7134`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7135
7136*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7137from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7138
7139** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7140
7141** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7142
7143** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7144functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7145Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7146as an argument.
7147
7148When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7149and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7150
7151** browse-url changes
7152
7153*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7154Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7155(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7156non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7157customization variables.
7158
7159*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7160
7161*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7162lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7163(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7164
7165** Changes in Ediff
7166
7167*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7168pops up the Info file for this command.
7169
7170*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7171the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7172merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7173directories).
7174
7175*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7176and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7177files in the same directory.
7178
7179*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7180The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7181related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7182
7183** Changes in Viper
7184
7185*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7186*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7187 instead of vip-.
7188*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7189*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7190Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7191*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7192*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7193*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7194color when Viper is in insert state.
7195*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7196Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7197viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7198
7199** Etags changes.
7200
7201*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7202default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7203Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7204variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7205not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7206
7207*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7208
7209*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7210constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7211
7212*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7213recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7214In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7215
7216*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7217C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7218recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7219methods and protocols.
7220
7221*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7222.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7223column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7224paragraph name.
7225
7226*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7227an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7228at least M times and as many as N times.
7229
7230** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7231in files has changed slightly.
7232
7233With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7234time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7235This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7236with old time-stamp-format values.
7237
7238In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7239(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7240This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7241reasons.
7242
7243In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7244natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7245fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7246(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7247time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7248specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7249
7250Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7251case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7252truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7253
7254The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7255being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7256future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7257recommended now will continue to work then.
7258
7259See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7260details.
7261
7262** There are some additional major modes:
7263
7264dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7265m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7266meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7267
7268** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7269copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7270into Emacs.
7271
7272** New Lisp packages include:
7273
7274*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7275
7276*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7277be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7278
7279*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7280
7281*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7282in shell buffers.
7283
7284*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7285See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7286and `elint-defun'.
7287
7288*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7289meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7290ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7291strings or comments.
7292
7293These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7294abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7295you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7296insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7297at these points.
7298
7299*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7300can visit them by short forms of their names.
7301
7302*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7303Emacs Lisp function at point.
7304
7305*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7306
7307*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7308switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7309
7310*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7311
7312*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7313
7314*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7315
7316*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7317from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7318
7319*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7320You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7321inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7322original place after inserting the copy.
7323
7324*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7325on the buffer.
7326
7327You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7328velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7329(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7330
7331Enable mouse-drag with:
7332 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7333-or-
7334 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7335
7336*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7337mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7338
7339*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7340It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7341
7342*** ogonek
7343
7344The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7345Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7346platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7347TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7348ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7349prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7350instance) and vice versa.
7351
7352To use this package load it using
7353 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7354Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7355 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7356 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7357The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7358ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7359
7360*** Interface to ph.
7361
7362Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7363
7364The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7365services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7366these servers.
7367
7368*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7369
7370*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7371You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7372while the real cursor does not move.
7373
7374*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7375for visiting your favorite web sites.
7376
7377*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7378so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7379
7380** movemail change
7381
7382Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7383mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7384supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7385user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7386
7387This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7388\f
7389* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7390
7391** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7392
7393Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7394end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7395Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7396file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7397file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7398
7399To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7400C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7401coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7402specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7403LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7404save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7405\f
7406* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7407
7408** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7409Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7410vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7411Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7412
7413** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7414to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7415
7416In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7417don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7418"win".
7419
7420** Basic Lisp changes
7421
7422*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7423evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7424
7425*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7426be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7427or by the user.
7428
7429The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7430
7431*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7432
7433(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7434(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7435
7436*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7437usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7438its argument.
7439
7440*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7441
7442*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7443
7444*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7445
7446*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7447error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7448include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7449`format' function.
7450
7451*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7452or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7453whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7454
7455*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7456either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7457adding one of these suffixes.
7458
7459*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7460which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7461If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7462
7463We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7464because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7465
7466*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7467
7468*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7469You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7470
7471*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7472conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7473
7474 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7475
7476BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7477BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7478
7479*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7480choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7481restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7482works using `save-current-buffer'.
7483
7484*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7485write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7486of the last form.
7487
7488*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7489which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7490last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7491as the last form.
7492
7493*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7494characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7495matches.
7496
7497For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7498
7499*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7500with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7501Then it returns that string.
7502
7503For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7504
7505(with-output-to-string
7506 (princ "The buffer is ")
7507 (princ (buffer-name)))
7508
7509returns "The buffer is foo".
7510
7511** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7512is non-nil.
7513
7514These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7515buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7516characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7517
7518*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7519a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7520
7521Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7522character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7523Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7524position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7525characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7526 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7527
7528ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7529Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7530non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7531characters".
7532
7533The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7534through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7535"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7536range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7537leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7538
7539*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7540(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7541multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7542character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7543
7544This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7545always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7546
7547However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7548
7549*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7550because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7551have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7552the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7553guaranteed.
7554
7555*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7556between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7557character).
7558
7559When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7560
7561 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7562 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7563 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7564 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7565 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7566
7567*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7568
7569*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7570`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7571more than the number of characters.
7572
7573You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7574it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7575\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7576is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7577follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7578newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7579
7580*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7581and returns a string containing those characters.
7582
7583*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7584(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7585counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7586character, sref signals an error.
7587
7588*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7589in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7590string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7591
7592*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7593in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7594region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7595
7596*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7597the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7598to a vector of the characters in it.
7599
7600*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7601of a string. You call it as follows:
7602
7603 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7604
7605This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7606STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7607This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7608Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7609it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7610
7611*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7612if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7613
7614*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7615if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7616
7617*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7618to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7619not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7620which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7621
7622(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7623
7624This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7625
7626The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7627If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7628are not included in the resulting value.
7629
7630The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7631at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7632WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7633is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7634
7635If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7636place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7637character extends across that column), then the padding character
7638PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7639string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7640column START-COLUMN.
7641
7642*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7643the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7644necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7645difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7646changed text, before the change.
7647
7648*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7649sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7650one character set for each script, not for each language.
7651
7652**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7653
7654**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7655
7656**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7657set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7658
7659**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7660name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7661which identify the character within that character set.
7662
7663**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7664byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7665opposite of split-char.
7666
7667**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7668of all the characters between BEG and END.
7669
7670**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7671of all the characters in a string.
7672
7673*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7674and specifying coding systems.
7675
7676**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7677system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7678of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7679(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7680and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7681as what to do about code conversion.)
7682
7683**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7684name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7685
7686**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7687for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7688except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7689
7690Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7691which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7692to match against a file name.
7693
7694VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7695a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7696decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7697to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7698systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7699specifies the coding system for encoding.
7700
7701If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7702or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7703
7704**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7705the coding system to use for network sockets.
7706
7707Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7708which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7709either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7710service names.
7711
7712VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7713a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7714decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7715to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7716systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7717specifies the coding system for encoding.
7718
7719If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7720or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7721
7722**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7723for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7724except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7725start the subprocess.
7726
7727**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7728systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7729when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7730(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7731to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7732
7733**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7734coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7735subprocess.
7736
7737It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7738but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7739start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7740connection permanently or until overridden.
7741
7742The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7743file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7744network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7745coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7746It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7747system for one operation at a time.
7748
7749**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7750files, subprocesses or network connections.
7751
7752**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7753coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7754The value is a cons cell,
7755 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7756where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7757the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7758input to the subprocess.
7759
7760**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7761change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7762
7763** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7764customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7765you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7766
7767You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7768variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7769information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7770legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7771customization.
7772
7773Thus, instead of writing
7774
7775 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7776 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7777
7778you would now write this:
7779
7780 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7781 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7782 :type 'boolean
7783 :group foo)
7784
7785The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7786two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7787describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7788for a description of them.
7789
7790The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7791should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7792
7793 (defgroup ispell nil
7794 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7795 :group 'processes)
7796
7797The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7798group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7799but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7800to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7801second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7802
7803Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7804package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7805have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7806package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7807first-level subgroups.
7808
7809** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7810
7811This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7812separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7813
7814** easy-mmode
7815
7816The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7817developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7818only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7819predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7820`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7821`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7822
7823** Text property changes
7824
7825*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7826text property.
7827
7828*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7829previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7830place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7831functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7832starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7833
7834If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7835LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7836of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7837position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7838
7839*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7840value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7841is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7842
7843** Changes in invisibility features
7844
7845*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7846hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7847is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7848should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7849would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7850make the overlay visible.
7851
7852During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7853invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7854needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7855which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7856the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7857t when it should hide it.
7858
7859*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7860
7861Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7862invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7863and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7864Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7865manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7866Here is an example of how to do this:
7867
7868 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7869 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7870 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7871 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7872
7873 ...
7874 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7875
7876 ...
7877 ;; When done with the overlays:
7878 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7879 ;; Or respectively:
7880 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7881
7882** Changes in syntax parsing.
7883
7884*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7885`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7886obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7887`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7888
7889If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7890is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7891used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7892
7893When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7894character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7895
7896 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7897 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7898
7899 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7900 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7901 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7902
7903 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7904 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7905 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7906 determine the syntax type of the character.
7907
7908 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7909 of the current buffer.
7910
7911*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7912value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7913for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7914
7915*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7916and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7917only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7918character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7919another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7920
7921These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7922text property.
7923
7924*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7925arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7926of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7927
7928*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7929(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7930element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7931nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7932string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7933
7934*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7935syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7936`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7937
7938** Changes in face features
7939
7940*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7941if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7942
7943*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7944of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7945
7946*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7947set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7948
7949*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7950set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7951
7952*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7953by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7954and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7955the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7956overlay property).
7957
7958This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7959arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7960
7961** Changes in file-handling functions
7962
7963*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7964directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7965they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7966is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7967
7968This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7969begins with ~.
7970
7971*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7972it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7973
7974*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7975the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7976
7977*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7978as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7979
7980*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7981character code conversion as well as other things.
7982
7983Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7984(formerly it did not).
7985
7986*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7987environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7988
7989*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7990instead of constant strings.
7991
7992*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7993to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7994any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7995
7996substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7997in the same way as before.
7998
7999*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8000The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8001which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8002
8003*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8004error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8005else, and returns nil.
8006
8007*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8008directory cannot be listed.
8009
8010** Changes in minibuffer input
8011
8012*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8013read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8014additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8015argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8016ways:
8017
8018 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8019 It is available through the history command M-n.
8020
8021*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8022read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8023argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8024minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8025enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8026
8027In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8028argument in this way.
8029
8030*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8031from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8032minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8033
8034** Echo area features
8035
8036*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8037echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8038minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8039after the echo area is cleared.
8040
8041*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8042in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8043
8044** Keyboard input features
8045
8046*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8047set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8048
8049*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8050received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8051by keyboard macros.
8052
8053** Frame-related changes
8054
8055*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8056creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8057hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8058
8059*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8060the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8061has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8062
8063*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8064selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8065value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8066in the selected frame.
8067
8068*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8069is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8070which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8071
8072** X Windows features
8073
8074*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8075x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8076x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8077
8078*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8079The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8080
8081*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8082MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8083A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8084
8085If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8086it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8087
8088** Subprocess features
8089
8090*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8091functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8092automatically.
8093
8094*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8095and returns the output from the command as a string.
8096
8097*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8098and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8099
8100** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8101does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8102
8103** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8104at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8105goes after the other menu items.
8106
8107** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8108of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8109around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8110are in use.
8111
8112The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8113series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8114
8115Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8116after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8117form.
8118
8119** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8120is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8121but its hook is still run.
8122
8123** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8124for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8125
8126If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8127regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8128useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8129
8130This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8131are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8132filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8133warned.
8134
8135** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8136way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8137
8138** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8139integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8140functions like display-time.
8141
8142** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8143name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8144
8145** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8146can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8147is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8148
8149** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8150if there is an error in compilation.
8151
8152** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8153switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8154argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8155they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8156
8157** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8158Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8159the *scratch* buffer.
8160
8161** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8162The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8163where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8164e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8165
8166** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8167and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8168It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8169
8170** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8171using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8172variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8173and compose-mail-other-frame.
8174
8175** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8176can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8177full name of the specified user will be returned.
8178
8179** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8180of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8181where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8182in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8183option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8184files at all.
8185
8186** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8187and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8188width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8189the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8190
8191For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8192minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8193with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8194is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8195
8196** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8197
8198** imenu.el changes.
8199
8200You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8201item from menu created by imenu.
8202
8203An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8204#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8205select one of those items.
8206\f
8207* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8208\f
8209* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8210
8211** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8212mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8213
8214** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8215use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8216Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8217\f
8218* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8219
8220** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8221To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8222
8223** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8224conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8225matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8226expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8227word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8228all caps.
8229
8230** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8231at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8232
8233When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8234does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8235as in previous Emacs versions.
8236
8237** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8238non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8239time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8240frames.
8241
8242** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8243if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8244This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8245Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8246accident.
8247
8248** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8249keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8250It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8251line and then executing the macro.
8252
8253This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8254
8255** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8256(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8257characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8258characters.
8259
8260** Font Lock mode
8261
8262*** Font Lock support modes
8263
8264Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8265below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8266hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8267to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8268Font Lock mode is enabled.
8269
8270For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8271
8272 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8273
8274in your ~/.emacs.
8275
8276*** lazy-lock
8277
8278The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8279only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8280becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8281Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8282occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8283buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8284Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8285
8286To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8287
8288 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8289
8290To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8291
8292** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8293
8294*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8295paren and key.
8296
8297*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8298supported.
8299
8300** Gnus changes.
8301
8302Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8303commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8304significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8305previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8306
8307Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8308between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8309
8310*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8311variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8312obsolete.
8313
8314*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8315missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8316
8317 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8318
8319*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8320
8321 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8322
8323*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8324referred.
8325
8326*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8327
8328 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8329
8330*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8331
8332 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8333
8334*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8335buffers.
8336
8337 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8338
8339*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8340
8341 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8342
8343*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8344
8345 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8346
8347*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8348
8349 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8350
8351*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8352is possible.
8353
8354 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8355
8356*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8357groups of groups.
8358
8359*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8360
8361*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8362batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8363
8364*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8365
8366*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8367
8368*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8369
8370 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8371
8372*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8373expiration times.
8374
8375*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8376
8377*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8378process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8379
8380*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8381articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8382bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8383
8384*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8385articles with the `*' command.
8386
8387*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8388
8389*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8390
8391 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8392
8393*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8394
8395*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8396`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8397
8398*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8399buffer.
8400
8401*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8402
8403*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8404
8405*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8406
8407 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8408
8409*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8410
8411 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8412
8413*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8414
8415*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8416
8417*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8418
8419 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8420 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8421
8422*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8423refetching.
8424
8425 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8426
8427*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8428buffer to allow easier treatment.
8429
8430*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8431
8432*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8433
8434 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8435
8436*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8437articles.
8438
8439 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8440
8441*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8442
8443*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8444cited text to hide is now customizable.
8445
8446 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8447
8448*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8449
8450 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8451
8452*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8453
8454*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8455
8456The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8457in greater detail.
8458\f
8459* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8460
8461** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8462second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8463asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8464exists.
8465
8466** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8467as well as lists.
8468
8469** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8470of a given keymap.
8471
8472** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8473given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8474keymap or nil.
8475
8476** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8477an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8478name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8479menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8480equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8481alias.
8482\f
8483* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8484
8485** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8486
8487Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8488This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8489was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8490far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8491pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8492
8493For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8494you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8495`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8496
8497** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8498
8499The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8500do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8501It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8502much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8503chapter of the manual for details.
8504
8505However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8506customization variables take effect.
8507
8508** Marking with the mouse.
8509
8510When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8511highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8512using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8513
8514** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8515
8516*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8517
8518*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8519to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8520
8521*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8522in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8523you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8524application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8525applications, these problems are significant.
8526
8527If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8528likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8529However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8530will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8531other DOS application as a subprocess.
8532
8533Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8534You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8535
8536If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8537subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8538have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8539Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8540separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8541Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8542
8543** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8544
8545This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8546which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8547minibuffer contains.
8548
8549** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8550
8551The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8552It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8553It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8554affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8555
8556The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8557it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8558and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8559when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8560
8561** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8562enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8563
8564** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8565F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8566Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8567
8568If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8569menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8570something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8571the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8572
8573 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8574
8575** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8576to replace the characters it "deletes".
8577
8578** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8579
8580** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8581a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8582select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8583It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8584immediately after the selected one.
8585
8586This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8587made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8588
8589** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8590
8591Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8592directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8593If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8594Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8595recover-session.
8596
8597You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8598auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8599will not work.
8600
8601Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8602normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8603this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8604bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8605now that the bug is fixed.
8606
8607** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8608
8609There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8610when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8611Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8612which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8613
8614If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8615telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8616VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8617the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8618
8619** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8620Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8621is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8622
8623There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8624Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8625enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8626The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8627remain normal.
8628
8629** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8630header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8631
8632Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8633known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8634offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8635Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8636
8637Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8638of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8639a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8640name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8641documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8642`mail-directory-stream'.)
8643
8644** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8645skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8646characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8647with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8648
8649Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8650- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8651wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8652
8653The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8654less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8655headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8656Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8657Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8658fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8659to a limitation in font-lock).
8660
8661External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8662
8663** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8664buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8665buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8666this example:
8667
8668 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8669 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8670
8671** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8672
8673*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8674
8675*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8676
8677*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8678
8679*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8680entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8681will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8682isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8683(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8684The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8685
8686*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8687does the same job.
8688
8689*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8690"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8691
8692*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8693text.
8694
8695** Font Lock mode
8696
8697*** Global Font Lock mode
8698
8699Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8700new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8701font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8702turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8703on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8704
8705For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8706
8707 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8708
8709in your ~/.emacs.
8710
8711*** Local Refontification
8712
8713In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8714However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8715those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8716command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8717
8718In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8719(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8720current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8721above and below point.
8722
8723With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8724
8725** Follow mode
8726
8727Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8728buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8729side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8730they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8731split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8732follow-mode.
8733
8734M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8735
8736To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8737command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8738
8739** hide-show changes.
8740
8741The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8742to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8743normal hooks.
8744
8745** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8746The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8747
8748** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8749recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8750those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8751
8752** MSDOS Changes
8753
8754*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8755Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8756
8757*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8758and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8759
8760*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8761
8762*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8763pressing both mouse buttons.
8764
8765*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8766restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8767are:
8768
8769**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8770now works.
8771
8772**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8773
8774**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8775implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8776
8777**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8778
8779**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8780
8781**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8782
8783**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8784
8785**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8786\f
8787* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8788
8789** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8790tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8791remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8792this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8793behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8794
8795** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8796
8797The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8798not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8799need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8800be different.
8801
8802It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8803than `system-type'.
8804
8805See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8806
8807** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8808now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8809
8810** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8811that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8812
8813** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8814no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8815reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8816
8817The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8818to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8819like this:
8820
8821 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8822
8823SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8824It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8825becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8826
8827REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8828seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8829means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8830
8831*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8832up if too much time passes.
8833
8834 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8835
8836This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8837If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8838of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8839form in BODY.
8840
8841*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8842a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8843call looks like this:
8844
8845 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8846
8847SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8848runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8849timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8850ARGS.
8851
8852Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8853command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8854command.
8855
8856REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8857time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8858does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8859each time Emacs becomes idle.
8860
8861If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8862idle for SECS seconds.
8863
8864*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8865all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8866programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8867instead.
8868
8869*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8870there is no answer within a certain time.
8871
8872 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8873
8874asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8875within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8876Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8877
8878** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8879arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8880meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8881arguments in between are ignored.
8882
8883This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8884the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8885
8886** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8887/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8888/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8889site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8890version.
8891
8892It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8893version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8894for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8895has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8896and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8897problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8898
8899** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8900.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8901systems with limited file name syntax.
8902
8903Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8904convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8905for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8906completions.el:
8907
8908(defvar save-completions-file-name
8909 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8910 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8911
8912This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8913depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8914convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8915Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8916MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8917
8918** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8919rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8920minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8921
8922** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8923marker from its buffer position.
8924
8925** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8926Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8927The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8928
8929** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8930that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8931condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8932of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8933matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8934regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8935
8936This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8937errors that happen often during editing.
8938
8939** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8940into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8941puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8942
8943** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8944now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8945
8946** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8947a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8948name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8949to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8950and not get-buffer-window.
8951
8952** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8953calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8954being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8955
8956If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8957buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8958property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8959non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8960are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8961property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8962over and over for the same text.
8963
8964** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8965
8966*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8967in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8968
8969;; @(#) HEADER: text
8970;; $HEADER: text $
8971
8972in addition to the normal
8973
8974;; HEADER: text
8975
8976*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8977checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8978lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8979
8980
a933dad1 8981\f
3787e12e 8982* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8983
8984----------------------------------------------------------------------
8985Copyright information:
8986
424d8b44 8987Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8988
8989 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8990 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8991 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8992 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8993
8994 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8995 of this document, or of portions of it,
8996 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8997 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8998\f
8999Local variables:
9000mode: outline
9001paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9002end: